B-85314EN-1_01 Fanuc Robodrill Custom PMC Functions
Short Description
This manual contence discribes how to create and edit custom PMC for Fanuc Robodrill D21iA machine....
Description
FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC
ROBODRILL ROBODRILL ROBODRILL ROBODRILL ROBODRILL ROBODRILL
@-D14M+A5 @-D14L+A5 @-D14S+A5 @-D21M+A5 @-D21L+A5 @-D21S+A5
CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
WARNING To use the products explained herein safely, read carefully and understand completely all the descriptions about safety at the beginning of this manual and those about the functions you are going to use. Failing to follow any safety precaution or any direction described herein may lead to death or injury. Always keep this manual near your product, so you can reference it whenever necessary.
B-85314EN-1/01
WARNING Before starting to install, operate, or maintain the product, carefully read and understand the "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS." Failing to follow any of these safety precautions and other cautions stated herein may lead to death or injury. The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is: Product name
Abbreviation
FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14 (M,L,S) i A5
α-D14 i A5
FANUC ROBODRILL α-D21 (M,L, S) i A5 Controller: A04B-0102- B201, B301, B302 FANUC Series 31i-B5 Mechanical Unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113 A04B-0102- B101,B102, B103, B104, B105, B106, B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116
α-D21 i A5
To help prevent accidents that may occur due to incorrect handling, this operator's manual indicates cautions with marks. The meaning of each mark is explained below. Before starting to read the text of the cautions, be sure to understand the meaning of the corresponding marks. Indicates that incorrect handling will invite an imminent danger of death or DANGER: serious injury.
WARNING:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to light or moderate injury.
CAUTION: ATTENTION: SUPPLEMENT:
Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to damage not only to the product of interest but also to other properties. Describes precautions for protecting the product of interest from damage. Describes information for effective and efficient use of the product of interest.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export of α-D14MiA5/D14LiA5/D14SiA5, α-D21MiA5/D21LiA5/D21SiA5 from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice. In this manual, we have tried to describe as many matters as possible. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible." If you wander whether a specific matter is possible, ask FANUC.
PREFACE
B-85314EN-1/01
PREFACE
1
PURPOSES OF THE MACHINE The FANUC ROBODRILL α-DiA5 series is a machine tool that operates under control of a CNC (computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, light milling, milling, and boring. It should not be used for any other purposes.
2
DEFINITION OF USERS
2.1
Operators
In this manual, the term operator refers to a person who operates the machine. The operator must read this manual and become familiar with its contents. If the operator operates the machine without becoming familiar with its contents, the operator and the people around the machine may be in serious danger. The operator is not allowed to carry out maintenance work that involves: (1) Removal of a cover that requires a tool for its removal (fixed cover) (2) Installation and movement of the machine
2.2
Daily Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Personnel
These personnel must have completed ROBODRILL course at the Robomachine Department at the FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge and must also be qualified by the company or organization to which they belong. Daily maintenance and preventive maintenance personnel must observe the "Cautions on Maintenance," described below. Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must observe during maintenance
p-1
PREFACE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2.3
B-85314EN-1/01
WARNING Before removing a cover for maintenance purposes, be sure to set the control unit cabinet door circuit breaker for the machine to its off position. Otherwise, an unexpected behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock. Before switching on the power with a cover removed for maintenance purposes, make sure that no one is beside the machine. Otherwise, an unexpected behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock. Before starting maintenance work, post a notice near the control unit cabinet door circuit breaker to indicate that no one except the worker of interest is allowed to switch on the power. Before switching on the power and operating the machine during or after maintenance work, make sure that no tool or the like is left in the machine. Otherwise, when the machine runs, it may strike the tool or the like toward people around the machine. When making electrical adjustments with a cover removed, use a tool with a sufficient electrical protection (for example, a screwdriver made of plastic). Otherwise, there is a risk of an electrical shock. After maintenance work, make sure that all components, including screws, that were removed for maintenance purposes are back in place. Otherwise, safety devices may fail to function, or injury may occur, because of a malfunction or electric shock. When replacing maintenance parts, be sure to keep the control unit cabinet door circuit breaker set to its off position. Otherwise, there may occur damage to the maintenance parts or an electrical shock. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shall not be engaged in replacement of the CNC memory backup battery or fluorescent lamps within the machine. Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to replace such electrical components. Work by any person with no sufficient knowledge may disable safety devices from working, resulting in an unexpected behavior of the machine that may cause injury or an electric shock. Be sure to close and lock the control unit cabinet door upon completion of maintenance work to prevent fluid such as coolant or chippings from entering the unit. Similarly, be sure to close the covers of the operator's panel and cable duct and securely tighten the mounting screws of the covers.
Maintenance Personnel
These personnel must have sufficient knowledge of machinery or electricity to perform maintenance properly, must have completed a maintenance course at the FA or Robomachine Department of the FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge, and must also be qualified by the company or organization to which they belong. Maintenance personnel perform work including: (1) Installation and movement of the machine (2) Repair of the machine (replacement of mechanical units and replacement of electric components that require setup and adjustment after being replaced) Maintenance personnel must observe the "Caution on Maintenance," described above. Experienced maintenance personnel, in particular, should avoid accidents due to carelessness or overconfidence. p-2
PREFACE
B-85314EN-1/01
3
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL This manual covers the following models: Model name FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14 (M,L,S) i A5 FANUC ROBODRILL α-D21 (M,L,S) i A5 Control unit: A04B-0102-B201, B301, B302 FANUC Series 31i-B5 Mechanical unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113 A04B-0102-B101, B102, B103, B104, B105, B106, B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116
Abbreviation α-D14 i A5 α-D21 i A5
The manuals for this machine include the following: (1) FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14iA5/D21iA5 Series OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN): Describes how to use and maintain this machine. (2) FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14iA5/D21iA5 Series CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN-1): This manual. Describes how to operate the custom PMC function, as well as programming. (3) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64484EN): Describes how to operate numerical control (NC) units and how to create programs. (4) FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14iA5/D21iA5 Series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN): Describes alarms, how to perform troubleshooting, and how to replace parts. (5) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64485EN): Describes how to perform troubleshooting and adjustment on numerical control (NC) units. Before using this machine, read the necessary parts of manual (1). For daily handling and for reference, use manuals (1) and (3). Use manuals (4) and (5) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of machine sections. Descriptions in manuals (1), (2), and (4) have priority over those in manuals (3) and (5). In you find any contradiction, assume that the description in manuals (1), (2), and (4) applies.
This manual contains minimum requirements for using the custom PMC function. If you require more detailed explanation, see the following manual: FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B, Series 35i-MODEL B PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)
p-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-85314EN-1/01
TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1 1
OUTLINE ................................................................................................. 1
2
EXPLANATION OF TERMS.................................................................... 3
3
NOTES .................................................................................................... 4
4
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 5
5
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 6 5.1 5.2
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......................................... 6 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 10 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
I/O Unit Model-A...................................................................................................10 I/O Link Connection Unit.......................................................................................22 Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ........................................................22
5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6
Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)..........................................37 Optional I/O Module Connection...........................................................................46 Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used.....................................46
5.2.3.1
Terminal Module B............................................................................................ 29
6
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC.................................... 47
7
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS ......................................... 48
8
EDITING ................................................................................................ 50 8.1 8.2
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ............................................................ 50 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS................................................................. 51 8.2.1 8.2.2
8.3 8.4 8.5
9
Switching to the Edit Screen ..................................................................................51 Editing Ladder Programs........................................................................................53
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES ...................................... 65 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ..................................................... 68 ENDING AN EDITING SESSION ................................................................ 70
CONFIRMATION................................................................................... 71 9.1 9.2
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS ..................................... 71 SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS................................................................................... 73
10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS ............................................................ 74 11 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA .......................................................... 78 11.1 11.2
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN...................................... 78 OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN ...................................................... 81
12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS.......................................................................................... 84 12.1 12.2 12.3
BASIC SIGNALS ....................................................................................... 105 MACHINE STATUS ................................................................................... 105 FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL .................................................. 106 c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18 12.19 12.20 12.21 12.22 12.23 12.24 12.25 12.26 12.27 12.28 12.29 12.30 12.31 12.32 12.33 12.34 12.35
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION ..................... 108 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION......................... 110 EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..................................... 113 M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89) ......................................... 116 INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION)................. 117 RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ........................................................... 117 ALARM OUTPUT 2.................................................................................... 117 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT...................................................................... 118 ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL .................................................... 120 OPERATOR'S PANEL............................................................................... 121 OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ............................................................ 122 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT ................................................................ 123 MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ................................................................... 124 COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW .................................................. 125 COMPLETION OF MACHINING................................................................ 125 FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL ............................................................. 126 AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ...................................................... 126 AI TOOL MONITOR................................................................................... 127 SPINDLE ................................................................................................... 127 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 128 POSITION SWITCH .................................................................................. 128 CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS ......................................... 129 CUSTOM MACROS .................................................................................. 130 M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ................................................................ 131 OPERATION CONTROL ........................................................................... 131 ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY ...................................... 132 MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP ..................................................................... 132 POWER-OFF............................................................................................. 132 OVERRIDE CONTROL ............................................................................. 133 ROBOT INTERFACE................................................................................. 134 Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item ..................................... 136 BLOCK SKIP ............................................................................................. 136
13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................. 137 14 SETTING PARAMETERS ................................................................... 143 15 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST ........................................... 144 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen .................. 144 PMC System Alarm Messages .................................................................. 152 Operation Errors ........................................................................................ 157 I/O Communication Error Messages.......................................................... 172
APPENDIX A
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III ......................... 181 A.1
CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................................................ 182 c-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-85314EN-1/01
A.2
LADDER PROGRAM EDITING ................................................................. 185 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 A.2.4 A.2.5 A.2.6
A.3 A.4 A.5
LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION . 190 CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION............................................. 193 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES .................................... 205 A.5.1
B
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 209 SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT ...... 213 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 214 OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS ...................................................................... 215
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................. 218 C.1 C.2
D
Ladder Program Message Editing ........................................................................205
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION............................................... 209 B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4
C
Title Editing..........................................................................................................185 Ladder Editing......................................................................................................186 Symbol and Comment Editing .............................................................................187 Message Editing ...................................................................................................188 I/O Module Editing ..............................................................................................189 System Parameter Editing ....................................................................................189
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 218 SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................ 218
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ........................................ 220 D.1 D.2 D.3
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY.......... 221 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM ................................................................................................ 223 CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA.............................................................. 225 D.3.1 D.3.2
D.4 D.5
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display.......................................225 Converting the Ladder Program ...........................................................................226
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC... 227 CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE ........................................................................................... 227
c-3
1.OUTLINE
B-85314EN-1/01
1
OUTLINE
The custom PMC function allows customers to create sequence programs on their own. The features of the function include: (1) Does not require hardware. (Low cost and increased maintainability) • The sequence program controller is built into the machine and, therefore, does not require any installation space, unlike in conventional systems. • Interfacing with ROBODRILL is at the software level and, therefore, does not require any signal lines, unlike in conventional systems. You can easily perform more advanced control by using a variety of interface signals. • You can control external devices by using the terminal block for the ROBODRILL installed as standard. (16 inputs and 16 outputs) You can add more additional I/O signals, if required. (Optional) (2) Variety of software functions • You can display your own alarm and operator messages on the ROBODRILL screen. • LEDs and other indicators for alarms are not required. • Full debugging functions are provided, such as the display of the operating status of created ladder programs, signal diagnosis, and trace (which displays changes in signal states with the passage of time). • Parameters such as variable timers and keep relays can be set on the screen. ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL Sequencer
System ladder program
External device
Custom PMC
Conventional system using a commercially available sequencer
External device
System using the custom PMC function
-1-
1.OUTLINE
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Independent system ladder program (ROBODRILL controller: first PMC) and custom PMC (jig controller: second PMC) • You can edit or input and output only custom PMC portions. • You can set any symbols and comments for all addresses. (The symbols and comments that have been set are displayed when the second PMC is selected. However, they are not displayed on the parameter and other screens that are common to the first and second PMCs.) • You can enable the display of alarms and messages simply by making message settings only for the main body of a ladder program. (You can enable the display of the alarms and messages without having to set message data (separate from the main body of the ladder program) for the multi-language display function.)
ROBODRILL System ladder program
Independent data
Custom PMC
Custom PMC
Custom PMC
Ladder program section
Ladder program section
+
+
Message
Message
Without multi-language display function
Can be input and output individually
Message data for multi-language display function
With multi-language display function
-2-
2.EXPLANATION OF TERMS
B-85314EN-1/01
2
EXPLANATION OF TERMS
Custom ladder program: Sequence program created by a customer to control jigs and so forth (second PMC) System ladder program: Sequence program prepared beforehand to exercise basic control on the ROBODRILL (first PMC) PMC: Hardware system software for performing control, editing, and other operations on custom and system ladder programs Soft key: Twelve buttons displayed at the bottom of the LCD panel QUICK screen: Application screen dedicated to ROBODRILL
-3-
3.NOTES
3
B-85314EN-1/01
NOTES
(1) Make sure that edited custom PMC (second PMC) ladder programs are attached to the machine. In addition, supply those ladder programs to your FANUC sales or service person. (2) Do not reference, or write to, addresses other than those specified. (3) Do not edit the system ladder program (first PMC). (4) When the I/O module allocation needs to be modified, be familiar with the specifications before making any addition or change. (5) Before installing edited custom PMC data in the machine, check the series and edition of the system ladder program. If the interface signals for use with a newly added system ladder program are used, the machine may not operate normally when the series and edition of the system ladder program currently used is older. (6) Do not use the following functional instructions: END1 (SUB1), END2 (SUB2), END (SUB64), WINDR (SUB51), SPCNT (SUB46), WINDW (SUB52), MMCWR (SUB98), MMCWW (SUB99), AXCTL (SUB53) (7) Before pulling out and inserting a memory card, turn the power OFF. (8) To use the custom PMC function, set the following PMC parameter bit. (See Chapter 10, "SETTING PMC PARAMETERS.") Parameter
Value
K15#7
1 0
Function Makes the custom PMC function available. Makes the custom PMC function unavailable.
where K: Keep relay, #7: Seventh bit (9) The custom PMC function of the D14/21iA5 does not require the ladder edit card. Editing is always permitted as long as the machine is in the emergency stop state. To disable custom PMC editing, use the following PMC parameter bit. Parameter
Value
K14#0
1 0
Function Disables custom PMC editing. Enables custom PMC editing.
(10) The M code used with a custom PMC function must always be the first M code. (11) As ladder editing software for the personal computer, use FANUC LADDER-III Version 6.30 or later. (12) The maximum allowable custom PMC program size (flash ROM size) is 128 KB. Not only ladder programs but also comments and messages consume the memory. Ensure that the maximum allowable program size is not exceeded.
-4-
4.SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
4
SPECIFICATIONS Programming language
Type of program Number of instructions Basic instruction processing time Program size Maximum allowable program size (Flash ROM size) Number of usable subprograms No. of inputs/ outputs Inputs
Outputs
Internal relay Message relay Special auxiliary relay Timer Counter Keep relay Data table
Non-hold type
Variable Fixed
Ladder program Second PMC 14 basic instructions, 84 functional instructions 9.1 nsec /step Approx. 16000 steps 128 KB 3500 16 as standard (The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 48 by adding terminal blocks.) Up to 1024 inputs can be added as options.) 16 as standard (The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 32 by adding terminal blocks.) Up to 1024 outputs can be added as options.) 1000 bytes (8000 points) 50 bytes (400 points) 100 points 80 points 140 points 30 points 10 bytes (80 points) 1000 bytes/8000 items (if used with an internal relay of the hold type)
-5-
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5 5.1
B-85314EN-1/01
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
You can use 16 inputs and 16 outputs of standard terminal block XT1. You can add terminal blocks XTC1 (16 inputs and 16 outputs) and XTC2 (16 inputs) to expand the number of inputs to up to 48 and that of outputs to up to 32. To use these inputs and outputs, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13. EXT. INTERFACE, and set "1:FOR CUSTOM PMC" in the input/output signal setting field. Refer to the "ROBODRILL α-D14/21iA5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN)" for details. Refer to the "ROBODRILL α- D14/21iA5 SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN)" for the specifications of the terminal blocks and connection cables. Wiring PCB unit: A04B-0102-C210#STA
[DI01]
Terminal block [XTC1]
16 inputs (X0.0 to X1.7) 16 outputs (Y0.0 to Y1.7)
Terminal block [XTC2]
16 inputs (X2.0 to X3.7)
[DI02]
Terminal block [XT1] 16 inputs (X4.0 to X5.7) 16 outputs (Y4.0 to Y5.7)
-6-
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from connector panel PC board to 50-pin terminal block (XT1) Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm Name UDI01 UDI02 UDI03 UDI04 UDI05 UDI06 UDI07 UDI08
Address X 4.0 X 4.1 X 4.2 X 4.3 X 4.4 X 4.5 X 4.6 X 4.7
Signal User DI01 User DI02 User DI03 User DI04 User DI05 User DI06 User DI07 User DI08
Destination XT1-01 XT1-02 XT1-05 XT1-06 XT1-07 XT1-08 XT1-11 XT1-12
UDI09 UDI10 UDI11 UDI12 UDI13 UDI14 UDI15 UDI16
X 5.0 X 5.1 X 5.2 X 5.3 X 5.4 X 5.5 X 5.6 X 5.7
User DI09 User DI10 User DI11 User DI12 User DI13 User DI14 User DI15 User DI16
XT1-13 XT1-14 XT1-17 XT1-18 XT1-19 XT1-20 XT1-23 XT1-24
UDO01 UDO02 UDO03 UDO04 UDO05 UDO06 UDO07 UDO08
Y 2.0 Y 2.1 Y 2.2 Y 2.3 Y 2.4 Y 2.5 Y 2.6 Y 2.7
User DO01 User DO02 User DO03 User DO04 User DO05 User DO06 User DO07 User DO08
XT1-25 XT1-26 XT1-29 XT1-30 XT1-31 XT1-32 XT1-35 XT1-36
UDO09 UDO10 UDO11 UDO12 UDO13 UDO14 UDO15 UDO16
Y 3.0 Y 3.1 Y 3.2 Y 3.3 Y 3.4 Y 3.5 Y 3.6 Y 3.7
User DO09 User DO10 User DO11 User DO12 User DO13 User DO14 User DO15 User DO16
XT1-37 XT1-38 XT1-41 XT1-42 XT1-43 XT1-44 XT1-47 XT1-48
-7-
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
X 4.0 +24E X 4.2 X 4.4 +24E X 4.6 X 5.0 +24E X 5.2 X 5.4 +24E X 5.6 Y 2.0 0V Y 2.2 Y 2.4 0V Y 2.6 Y 3.0 0V Y 3.2 Y 3.4 0V Y 3.6 0V
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
X 4.1 +24E X 4.3 X 4.5 +24E X 4.7 X 5.1 +24E X 5.3 X 5.5 +24E X 5.7 Y 2.1 0V Y 2.3 Y 2.5 0V Y 2.7 Y 3.1 0V Y 3.3 Y 3.5 0V Y 3.7 +24E
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from DI01 to 50-pin terminal block (XTC1) Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm Name UDI17 UDI18 UDI19 UDI20 UDI21 UDI22 UDI23 UDI24
Address X0.0 X0.1 X0.2 X0.3 X0.4 X0.5 X0.6 X0.7
Signal User DI17 User DI18 UserDI19 User DI20 User DI21 User DI22 User DI23 User DI24
Destination XTC1-01 XTC1-02 XTC1-05 XTC1-06 XTC1-07 XTC1-08 XTC1-11 XTC1-12
UDI25 UDI26 UDI27 UDI28 UDI29 UDI30 UDI31 UDI32
X1.0 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7
User DI25 User DI26 User DI27 User DI28 User DI29 User DI30 User DI31 User DI32
XTC1-13 XTC1-14 XTC1-17 XTC1-18 XTC1-19 XTC1-20 XTC1-23 XTC1-24
UDO17 UDO18 UDO19 UDO20 UDO21 UDO22 UDO23 UDO24
Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7
User DO17 User DO18 User DO19 User DO20 User DO21 User DO22 User DO23 User DO24
XTC1-25 XTC1-26 XTC1-29 XTC1-30 XTC1-31 XTC1-32 XTC1-35 XTC1-36
UDO25 UDO26 UDO27 UDO28 UDO29 UDO30 UDO31 UDO32
Y1.0 Y1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y1.4 Y1.5 Y1.6 Y1.7
User DO25 User DO26 User DO27 User DO28 User DO29 User DO30 User DO31 User DO32
XTC1-37 XTC1-38 XTC1-41 XTC1-42 XTC1-43 XTC1-44 XTC1-47 XTC1-48
-8-
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
X0.0 +24E X0.2 X0.4 +24E X0.6 X1.0 +24E X1.2 X1.4 +24E X1.6 Y0.0 0V Y0.2 Y0.4 0V Y0.6 Y1.0 0V Y1.2 Y1.4 0V Y1.6 0V
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
X0.1 +24E X0.3 X0.5 +24E X0.7 X1.1 +24E X1.3 X1.5 +24E X1.7 Y0.1 0V Y0.3 Y0.5 0V Y0.7 Y1.1 0V Y1.3 Y1.5 0V Y1.7 +24E
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connection diagram from DI02 to 34-pin terminal block (XTC2) Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm Name UDI33 UDI34 UDI35 UDI36 UDI37 UDI38 UDI39 UDI40
Address X2.0 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7
Signal User DI33 User DI34 User DI35 User DI36 User DI37 User DI38 User DI39 User DI40
Destination XTC2-01 XTC2-02 XTC2-05 XTC2-06 XTC2-07 XTC2-08 XTC2-11 XTC2-12
UDI41 UDI42 UDI43 UDI44 UDI45 UDI46 UDI47 UDI48
X3.0 X3.1 X3.2 X3.3 X3.4 X3.5 X3.6 X3.7
User DI41 User DI42 User DI43 User DI44 User DI45 UserDI46 User DI47 User DI48
XTC2-13 XTC2-14 XTC2-17 XTC2-18 XTC2-19 XTC2-20 XTC2-23 XTC2-24
-9-
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
X2.0 +24E X2.2 X2.4 +24E X2.6 X3.0 +24E X3.2 X3.4 +24E X3.6 +24E +24E +24E 0V 0V
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
X2.1 +24E X2.3 X2.5 +24E X2.7 X3.1 +24E X3.3 X3.5 +24E X3.7 +24E +24E 0V 0V 0V
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2
OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.1
I/O Unit Model-A
By installing an I/O Unit Model-A, you can add up to 96 inputs and 64 outputs in the case of standard setting. The expansion section is in module units, so that you can select the modules that meet your specifications. You can add up to five modules (two output modules and three input modules). Vertical type Interface module Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with input modules
○
○
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 5
○
○ Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules
- 10 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Horizontal type
1
Input module
Name AID16C
3
4
No. of signals 16
5
Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules
Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with input modules
Interface module
Classificati on
2
(Specifications of input/output modules) Type Voltage used Common Shape of connection Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AID16D
16
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
24 V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AID32E1
32
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0/24 V
MR connector made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
AID32E2
32
Insulated, DC input
24 V d.c.
0/24 V
Flat cable connector
Output
AOD08C
8
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
0V
Terminal block (M3.5)
module
AOD08D
8
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AOD16C
16
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
0V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AOD16D
16
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
Terminal block (M3.5)
AOD32C1
32
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
0V
MR connector made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
AOD32C2
32
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
0V
Flat cable connector
AOD32D1
32
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
MR connector made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
AOD32D2
32
Insulated, DC output
12-24 V d.c.
24 V
AOR08G
8
Relay output
250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.
-
Flat cable connector Terminal block (M3.5)
AOR16G
16
Relay output
250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.
-
Terminal block (M3.5)
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal classification
Expansion section slot (see the above figure and the figure on the previous page)
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal (up to 96 inputs)
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
16, 32 16, 32 16, 32 8, 16, 32 8, 16, 32
X200.0 to X203.7 X204.0 to X207.7 X208.0 to X211.7 Y200.0 to Y203.7 Y204.0 to Y207.7
Output signal (up to 64 outputs)
- 11 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01 02
02 A0
03 04
A1
04
A2
05 06
A3
08
06
08
A6
09 10
10
B0
11 12
12
B2
13 14
14
B4
15 16
16
B6
17 18
18
19
B5 B6
17
B7
B3 B4
15
B5
B1 B2
13
B3
A7 B0
11
B1
A5 A6
09
A7
A3 A4
07
A5
A1 A2
05
A4
07
A0
03
B7
19 20
20
[AID16C]
[AID16D]
[Address allocation] Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
X 200.0 X 200.1 X 200.2 X 200.3 X 200.4 X 200.5 X 200.6 X 200.7
X 204.0 X 204.1 X 204.2 X 204.3 X 204.4 X 204.5 X 204.6 X 204.7
X 208.0 X 208.1 X 208.2 X 208.3 X 208.4 X 208.5 X 208.6 X 208.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
X 201.0 X 201.1 X 201.2 X 201.3 X 201.4 X 201.5 X 201.6 X 201.7
X 205.0 X 205.1 X 205.2 X 205.3 X 205.4 X 205.5 X 205.6 X 205.7
X 209.0 X 209.1 X 209.2 X 209.3 X 209.4 X 209.5 X 209.6 X 209.7
- 12 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01 50
41
49
40
16
07 A0
C0
32
24 A1
C1
48
39 A2
C2
15
06 A3
C3
31
23 A4
C4
47
38 A5
C5
30
22 A6
C6
46
37 A7
C7
45
36
29
21
12
03 B0
D0
28
20 B1
D1
44
35 B2
D2
11
02 B3
D3
27
19 B4
D4
43
34 B5
D5
10
01 B6
D6
42
33 B7
D7
[AID32E1]
[Address allocation] Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
X 200.0 X 200.1 X 200.2 X 200.3 X 200.4 X 200.5 X 200.6 X 200.7
X 204.0 X 204.1 X 204.2 X 204.3 X 204.4 X 204.5 X 204.6 X 204.7
X 208.0 X 208.1 X 208.2 X 208.3 X 208.4 X 208.5 X 208.6 X 208.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
X 202.0 X 202.1 X 202.2 X 202.3 X 202.4 X 202.5 X 202.6 X 202.7
X 206.0 X 206.1 X 206.2 X 206.3 X 206.4 X 206.5 X 206.6 X 206.7
X 210.0 X 210.1 X 210.2 X 210.3 X 210.4 X 210.5 X 210.6 X 210.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
X 201.0 X 201.1 X 201.2 X 201.3 X 201.4 X 201.5 X 201.6 X 201.7
X 205.0 X 205.1 X 205.2 X 205.3 X 205.4 X 205.5 X 205.6 X 205.7
X 209.0 X 209.1 X 209.2 X 209.3 X 209.4 X 209.5 X 209.6 X 209.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
X 203.0 X 203.1 X 203.2 X 203.3 X 203.4 X 203.5 X 203.6 X 203.7
X 207.0 X 207.1 X 207.2 X 207.3 X 207.4 X 207.5 X 207.6 X 207.7
X 211.0 X 211.1 X 211.2 X 211.3 X 211.4 X 211.5 X 211.6 X 211.7
- 13 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
B24
B12
A24
A12
B23
B11 A0
C0
A23
A11 A1
C1
B22
B10 A2
C2
A22
A10 A3
C3
B21
B09 A4
C4
A21
A09 A5
C5
B20
B08 A6
C6
A20
A08 A7
C7
B18
B06
A18
A06
B17
B05 B0
D0
A17
A05 B1
D1
B16
B04 B2
D2
A16
A04 B3
D3
B15
B03 B4
D4
A15
A03 B5
D5
B14
B02 B6
D6
A14
A02 B7
D7
[AID32E2]
[Address allocation] Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
X 200.0 X 200.1 X 200.2 X 200.3 X 200.4 X 200.5 X 200.6 X 200.7
X 204.0 X 204.1 X 204.2 X 204.3 X 204.4 X 204.5 X 204.6 X 204.7
X 208.0 X 208.1 X 208.2 X 208.3 X 208.4 X 208.5 X 208.6 X 208.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
X 202.0 X 202.1 X 202.2 X 202.3 X 202.4 X 202.5 X 202.6 X 202.7
X 206.0 X 206.1 X 206.2 X 206.3 X 206.4 X 206.5 X 206.6 X 206.7
X 210.0 X 210.1 X 210.2 X 210.3 X 210.4 X 210.5 X 210.6 X 210.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
X 201.0 X 201.1 X 201.2 X 201.3 X 201.4 X 201.5 X 201.6 X 201.7
X 205.0 X 205.1 X 205.2 X 205.3 X 205.4 X 205.5 X 205.6 X 205.7
X 209.0 X 209.1 X 209.2 X 209.3 X 209.4 X 209.5 X 209.6 X 209.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
X 203.0 X 203.1 X 203.2 X 203.3 X 203.4 X 203.5 X 203.6 X 203.7
X 207.0 X 207.1 X 207.2 X 207.3 X 207.4 X 207.5 X 207.6 X 207.7
X 211.0 X 211.1 X 211.2 X 211.3 X 211.4 X 211.5 X 211.6 X 211.7
- 14 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01 02
02
03
03 04
LOAD
05
04 A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
06 LOAD
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
20
A7
19 20
[AOD08C]
[AOD08D]
[Address allocation] Slot 4 Slot 5 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
A6
17
18 LOAD
A5
15
16 LOAD
A4
13
14 LOAD
A3
11
12 LOAD
A2
09
10 LOAD
A1
07
08 LOAD
A0
05
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
- 15 -
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01 02
LOAD
03
LOAD
LOAD
04 05
LOAD
LOAD
06 07
LOAD
LOAD
08 09
LOAD
10
02 A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
11
04
06
LOAD
14 15
LOAD
LOAD
16 17
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
A3 A4
07 08
A5 A6
09 10
A7
11
13
LOAD
A1 A2
05
12 LOAD
A0
03
18 19 20
12 B0
LOAD
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
[AOD16C]
B0
13 14
B1 B2
15 16
B3 B4
17 18
B5 B6
19 20
B7
[AOD16D]
[Address allocation] Slot 4 Slot 5 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
- 16 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01 50
08
49
07 A0
LOAD
LOAD
24 A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
32 LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
C5 22
30
C6 37
A7
LOAD
C4 38
47 LOAD
C3 23
31 LOAD
C2 06
15 LOAD
C1 39
48 LOAD
C0
LOAD
16
C7
LOAD
46
40
50
41
13
04
12 LOAD
03 B0
LOAD
B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
28 LOAD
44 LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
D5
LOAD
01 B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
42 LOAD
D4 34
10 LOAD
D3 19
43 LOAD
D2 02
27 LOAD
D1 35
11 LOAD
D0 20
D6 33 D7
29
21
45
36
[AOD32C1]
Slot 4
[Address allocation] Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Y 200.0 Y 200.1 Y 200.2 Y 200.3 Y 200.4 Y 200.5 Y 200.6 Y 200.7
Y 204.0 Y 204.1 Y 204.2 Y 204.3 Y 204.4 Y 204.5 Y 204.6 Y 204.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
Y 201.0 Y 201.1 Y 201.2 Y 201.3 Y 201.4 Y 201.5 Y 201.6 Y 201.7
Y 205.0 Y 205.1 Y 205.2 Y 205.3 Y 205.4 Y 205.5 Y 205.6 Y 205.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
- 17 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
B19
B07
B23
B11 A0
LOAD
A11 A1
LOAD
B10 A2
LOAD
A3
LOAD
A22 LOAD
A4
A09 A5
LOAD
A6
LOAD
C5 B08
A20
C6 A08
A7
LOAD
C4
LOAD
B20 LOAD
C3 B09
A21 LOAD
C2 A10
B21 LOAD
C1
LOAD
B22 LOAD
C0
LOAD
A23
C7
LOAD
A24
A12
B24
B12
B13
B01
B17
B05 B0
LOAD
A17 LOAD
A05 B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B16 LOAD
B3
LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5 B02
B6
LOAD
B7
LOAD
A14 LOAD
D4 A03
B14 LOAD
D3 B03
A15 LOAD
D2 A04
B15 LOAD
D1 B04
A16 LOAD
D0
LOAD
D6 A02 D7
A18
A06
B18
B06
[AOD32C2]
Slot 4
[Address allocation] Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Y 200.0 Y 200.1 Y 200.2 Y 200.3 Y 200.4 Y 200.5 Y 200.6 Y 200.7
Y 204.0 Y 204.1 Y 204.2 Y 204.3 Y 204.4 Y 204.5 Y 204.6 Y 204.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
Y 201.0 Y 201.1 Y 201.2 Y 201.3 Y 201.4 Y 201.5 Y 201.6 Y 201.7
Y 205.0 Y 205.1 Y 205.2 Y 205.3 Y 205.4 Y 205.5 Y 205.6 Y 205.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
- 18 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01 50
41
49
40
16 LOAD
07 A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
32 LOAD
48 LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
C5
LOAD
22 A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
46 LOAD
C4 38
30 LOAD
C3 23
47 LOAD
C2 06
31 LOAD
C1 39
15 LOAD
C0 24
C6 37 C7
18
09
45
36
29
21
12
03 B0
LOAD
LOAD
20 B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
44 LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5 01
B6
D6
LOAD
42
33 B7
LOAD
D4 34
10 LOAD
D3 19
43 LOAD
D2 02
27 LOAD
D1 35
11 LOAD
D0
LOAD
28
D7
LOAD
14
05
[AOD32D1]
Slot 4
[Address allocation] Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Y 200.0 Y 200.1 Y 200.2 Y 200.3 Y 200.4 Y 200.5 Y 200.6 Y 200.7
Y 204.0 Y 204.1 Y 204.2 Y 204.3 Y 204.4 Y 204.5 Y 204.6 Y 204.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
Y 201.0 Y 201.1 Y 201.2 Y 201.3 Y 201.4 Y 201.5 Y 201.6 Y 201.7
Y 205.0 Y 205.1 Y 205.2 Y 205.3 Y 205.4 Y 205.5 Y 205.6 Y 205.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
- 19 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
B24
B12
A24
A12
B23 LOAD
B11 A0
LOAD
A1
LOAD
A2
LOAD
A23 LOAD
B22 LOAD
A3
LOAD
A4
LOAD
A5
C5
LOAD
B08 A6
LOAD
A7
LOAD
A20 LOAD
C4 A09
B20 LOAD
C3 B09
A21 LOAD
C2 A10
B21 LOAD
C1 B10
A22 LOAD
C0 A11
C6 A08 C7
A19
A07
B18
B06
A18
A06
B17
B05 B0
LOAD
LOAD
A05 B1
LOAD
B2
LOAD
B3
LOAD
B16 LOAD
B4
LOAD
B5
LOAD
D5 B02
B6
D6
LOAD
A14
A02 B7
LOAD
D4 A03
B14 LOAD
D3 B03
A15 LOAD
D2 A04
B15 LOAD
D1 B04
A16 LOAD
D0
LOAD
A17
D7
LOAD
A13
A01
[AOD32D2]
Slot 4
[Address allocation] Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Y 200.0 Y 200.1 Y 200.2 Y 200.3 Y 200.4 Y 200.5 Y 200.6 Y 200.7
Y 204.0 Y 204.1 Y 204.2 Y 204.3 Y 204.4 Y 204.5 Y 204.6 Y 204.7
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
Y 201.0 Y 201.1 Y 201.2 Y 201.3 Y 201.4 Y 201.5 Y 201.6 Y 201.7
Y 205.0 Y 205.1 Y 205.2 Y 205.3 Y 205.4 Y 205.5 Y 205.6 Y 205.7
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
- 20 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
01
01 V
02 V
03
LOAD
V
A1
V
A2
LOAD
LOAD
A3
LOAD
11
13
LOAD
V
LOAD
A5
V
17
A6
LOAD
19
09
A7 LOAD
20
A5 A6
10
A7
11 12 13
B0 B1
14 15
B2 B3
16 17
LOAD
18
A4 08
LOAD
16
A3
07
LOAD
LOAD
15
LOAD
V
A4 14
LOAD
V
LOAD
A2
06
V
12 V
05
LOAD
10
A0 A1
04
LOAD
08 09
03
LOAD
06 07
02
LOAD
LOAD
05
LOAD
V
A0 04
LOAD
V
LOAD
B4 18
19
B5 B6
20
B7
LOAD
[AOR08G]
[AOR16G]
AOR08G A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
Slot 4 Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
AOR16G Slot 5 Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
- 21 -
Slot 4 Y 202.0 Y 202.1 Y 202.2 Y 202.3 Y 202.4 Y 202.5 Y 202.6 Y 202.7
Slot 5 Y 206.0 Y 206.1 Y 206.2 Y 206.3 Y 206.4 Y 206.5 Y 206.6 Y 206.7
Y 203.0 Y 203.1 Y 203.2 Y 203.3 Y 203.4 Y 203.5 Y 203.6 Y 203.7
Y 207.0 Y 207.1 Y 207.2 Y 207.3 Y 207.4 Y 207.5 Y 207.6 Y 207.7
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.2
B-85314EN-1/01
I/O Link Connection Unit
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal classification
Signal address
Input signal (128 inputs) Output signal (128 outputs)
5.2.3
X212.0 to X227.7 Y212.0 to Y227.7
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal classification
Connector on I/O module
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal (48 inputs)
CE56 CE57 CE56 CE57
24 24 16 16
X240.0 to X242.7 X243.0 to X245.7 Y240.0 to Y241.7 Y242.0 to Y243.7
Output signal (32 outputs)
Connector table CE56 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CE57
A 0V X240.0 X240.2 X240.4 X240.6 X241.0 X241.2 X241.4 X241.6 X242.0 X242.2 X242.4 X242.6 DICOM0
B +24A X240.1 X240.3 X240.5 X240.7 X241.1 X241.3 X241.5 X241.7 X242.1 X242.3 X242.5 X242.7
Y240.0 Y240.2 Y240.4 Y240.6 Y241.0 Y241.2 Y241.4 Y241.6 DOCOM DOCOM
Y240.1 Y240.3 Y240.5 Y240.7 Y241.1 Y241.3 Y241.5 Y241.7 DOCOM DOCOM
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A 0V X243.0 X243.2 X243.4 X243.6 X244.0 X244.2 X244.4 X244.6 X245.0 X245.2 X245.4 X245.6
B +24A X243.1 X243.3 X243.5 X243.7 X244.1 X244.3 X244.5 X244.7 X245.1 X245.3 X245.5 X245.7 DICOM5
Y242.0 Y242.2 Y242.4 Y242.6 Y243.0 Y243.2 Y243.4 Y243.6 DOCOM DOCOM
Y242.1 Y242.3 Y242.5 Y242.7 Y243.1 Y243.3 Y243.5 Y243.7 DOCOM DOCOM
Note) +24A on CE56-B01 and CE57-B01 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
- 22 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (1) I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24A
CPD1 (01)
+24A
(02)
0V
CE56 (B01) (A01)
X240.0 X240.1 X240.2 X240.3 X240.4 X240.5 X240.6 X240.7
(A02)
RV
(B02)
RV
(A03)
RV
(B03)
RV
(A04)
RV
(B04)
RV
(A05)
RV
(B05)
RV
(A14)
(DICOM0) X241.0 X241.1
(B06)
RV
X241.2
RV
X241.3
RV
X241.4
RV
X241.5
RV
X241.6
RV
X241.7
(A06)
RV
(A07) (B07) (A08) (B08) (A09) (B09)
RV
- 23 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
X242.0
RV
X242.1
RV
X242.2 X242.3 X242.4
CE56 (A10) (B10) (A11)
RV
(B11)
RV
(A12)
RV
X242.5
RV
X242.6
RV
X242.7
RV
(B12) (A13) (B13)
- 24 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (2) I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24A
CPD1 (01)
+24A
(02)
0V
CE57 (B01) (A01)
X243.0 X243.1 X243.2 X243.3 X243.4 X243.5 X243.6
(B02)
RV
(A03)
RV
(B03)
RV
(A04)
RV
(B04)
RV
(A05)
RV
X243.7
RV
X244.0
RV
X244.1
RV
X244.2
RV
X244.3
RV
X244.4
RV
X244.5
RV
X244.6
RV
X244.7
(A02)
RV
(B05)
(A06) (B06) (A07) (B07) (A08) (B08) (A09) (B09)
RV
- 25 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
X245.0
RV
X245.1
RV
X245.2 X245.3 X245.4
CE57 (A10) (B10) (A11)
RV
(B11)
RV
(A12)
RV
X245.5
RV
X245.6
RV
X245.7
RV
(B12) (A13) (B13) (B14)
(DICOM5)
NOTE X240.0 through X240.7 and X245.0 through X245.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24V d.c. power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring,the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0V power supply is recommended whereever possible.For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common voltage can be selected, the input is “0” when the DICOMx common select pin is connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24 V d.c. power supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 when used. When addresses from X240.0 to X240.7 and X245.0 to X245.7 are not used, connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 to the 0V power supply.
- 26 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals (1) I/O module A20B-2004-0691
DOCOM
CE56 (A24),(B24) (A25),(B25)
24V d.c. EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
V+ 0V 0V
Y240.0
(A16) DV
Y240.1
DV
(B16)
Y240.2
DV
(A17)
DV
(B17)
DV
(A18)
DV
(B18)
DV
(A19)
DV
(B19)
DV
(A20)
DV
(B20)
DV
(A21)
DV
(B21)
DV
(A22)
DV
(B22)
DV
(A23)
DV
(B23)
Y240.3 Y240.4 Y240.5 Y240.6 Y240.7
Y241.0 Y241.1 Y241.2 Y241.3 Y241.4 Y241.5 Y241.6 Y241.7
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57. It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57. - 27 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals (2) I/O module A20B-2004-0691
DOCOM
CE57 (A24),(B24) (A25),(B25)
24V d.c. EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
V+ 0V 0V
Y242.0
(A16) DV
Y242.1
DV
(B16)
Y242.2
DV
(A17)
DV
(B17)
DV
(A18)
DV
(B18)
DV
(A19)
DV
(B19)
DV
(A20)
DV
(B20)
DV
(A21)
DV
(B21)
DV
(A22)
DV
(B22)
DV
(A23)
DV
(B23)
Y242.3 Y242.4 Y242.5 Y242.6 Y242.7
Y243.0 Y243.1 Y243.2 Y243.3 Y243.4 Y243.5 Y243.6 Y243.7
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57. It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57. - 28 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2.3.1
Terminal Module B
This module is connected to additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel to relay input/output signals via a screw terminal block. Up to two terminal modules can be mounted. In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal classification
Terminal Module
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal (48 inputs)
1st module (#1) 2nd module (#2)
24 24
X240.0 to X242.7 X243.0 to X245.7
Output signal (32 outputs)
1st module (#1) 2nd module (#2)
16 16
Y240.0 to Y241.7 Y242.0 to Y243.7
Wiring PCB A16B-1110-0520 JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
24V d.c. external power supply (DOCOM)
CE56
CE70
24 inputs (X240.0 to X242.7) 16 outputs (Y240.0 to Y241.7)
Terminal module B#1 A03B-0815-C022
CE70
CE57
24V d.c. power supply from Wriing PCB (+24A)
CPD1
24 inputs (X243.0 to X245.7) 16 outputs (Y242.0 to Y243.7)
Terminal module B#2 A03B-0815-C022
I/O module A20B-2002-0691
*
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2. It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.
- 29 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Pin layout of terminal module B (#1) [Connection between CE56 and CE70] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
0V X240.0 X240.2 X240.4 X240.6 X241.0 X241.2 X241.4 X241.6 X242.0 X242.2 X242.4 X242.6 DICOM0 Y240.0 Y240.2 Y240.4 Y240.6 Y241.0 Y241.2 Y241.4 Y241.6 DOCOM DOCOM
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
+24A X240.1 X240.3 X240.5 X240.7 X241.1 X241.3 X241.5 X241.7 X242.1 X242.3 X242.5 X242.7
Y240.1 Y240.3 Y240.5 Y240.7 Y241.1 Y241.3 Y241.5 Y241.7 DOCOM DOCOM
XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0V DICOM0 X240.2 X240.3 DICOM0 X240.6 X240.7 +24A X241.2 X241.3 +24A X241.6 X241.7 +24A X242.2 X242.3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
0V DICOM0 X240.0 X240.1 DICOM0 X240.4 X240.5 +24A X241.0 X241.1 +24A X241.4 X241.5 +24A X242.0 X242.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+24A X242.6 X242.7 0V Y240.2 Y240.3 0V Y240.6 Y240.7 0V Y241.2 Y241.3 0V Y241.6 Y241.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24A X242.4 X242.5 0V Y240.0 Y240.1 0V Y240.4 Y240.5 0V Y241.0 Y241.1 0V Y241.4 Y241.5 DOCOM
NOTE +24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there. DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2. As for DICOM0, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 30 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Pin layout of terminal module B (#2) [Connection between CE57 and CE70] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
0V X243.0 X243.2 X243.4 X243.6 X244.0 X244.2 X244.4 X244.6 X245.0 X245.2 X245.4 X245.6
Y242.0 Y242.2 Y242.4 Y242.6 Y243.0 Y243.2 Y243.4 Y243.6 DOCOM DOCOM
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
+24A X243.1 X243.3 X243.5 X243.7 X244.1 X244.3 X244.5 X244.7 X245.1 X245.3 X245.5 X245.7 DICOM5 Y242.1 Y242.3 Y242.5 Y242.7 Y243.1 Y243.3 Y243.5 Y243.7 DOCOM DOCOM
XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0V DICOM5 X243.2 X243.3 DICOM5 X243.6 X243.7 +24A X244.2 X244.3 +24A X244.6 X244.7 +24A X245.2 X245.3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
0V DICOM5 X243.0 X243.1 DICOM5 X243.4 X243.5 +24A X244.0 X244.1 +24A X244.4 X244.5 +24A X245.0 X245.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+24A X245.6 X245.7 0V Y242.2 Y242.3 0V Y242.6 Y242.7 0V Y243.2 Y243.3 0V Y243.6 Y243.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24A X245.4 X245.5 0V Y242.0 Y242.1 0V Y242.4 Y242.5 0V Y243.0 Y243.1 0V Y243.4 Y243.5 DOCOM
NOTE +24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there. DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2. As for DICOM5, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 31 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #1 I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24A
Wiring PCB
CPD1 (01) (02)
XS09 (A05) (B05)
+24A
Terminal module B#1
CE70 (B01) (A01)
CE56 (B01) (A01)
+24
X240.1 X240.2 X240.3 X240.4 X240.5 X240.6 X240.7
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
(A02)
(A02)
(B02)
(B02)
(A03)
(A03)
(B03)
(B03)
(A04)
(A04)
(B04)
(B04)
(A05)
(A05)
(B05)
(B05)
(23) (5) (6) (7)
X241.1 X241.2 X241.3 X241.4 X241.5 X241.6 X241.7
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
XB2
0V
(A14)
(A14)
(A06)
(A06)
(B06)
(B06)
(A07)
(A07)
(B07)
(B07)
(A08)
(A08)
(B08)
(B08)
(A09)
(A09)
(29) (11) (12)
(B09)
(B09)
(13)
(24) (25) (26) (8) (9) (10) (27) (28)
+24A
X241.0
XT70A (18) (19)
(4) (21) (22)
+24 DICOM0
0V
(20) (2) (3)
- 32 -
0V
X240.0
XB1
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Terminal module B#1
+24A
I/O module A20B-2004-0691
X242.0
X242.1
X242.2
X242.3
X242.4
X242.5
X242.6
X242.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
CE56 (A10)
CE70 (A10)
XT70A (30) (31)
(B10)
(B10)
(32)
(A11)
(A11)
(14) (15)
(B11)
(B11)
(A12)
(A12)
(16) XT70B (17) (18)
(B12)
(B12)
(19)
(A13)
(A13)
(1) (2)
(B13)
(B13)
(3)
NOTE X240.0 to X240.7 are DI pins that allows common signal selection. Specifically, when setting terminal XB1 is set to 0 V and setting terminal XB2 is set to +24, and DICOM0 is connected to 24V d.c., DI signals with logic inverted can be input. In this case, if a cable ground-fault accident occurs, a state equivalent to the DI signal ON state is observed. From the point of view of safety, setting terminal XB1 should be set to +24 and XB2 be set to 0 V, where possible, so that 0 V is applied to DICOM0.
- 33 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2 I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24A
Wiring PCB
CPD1 (01) (02)
XS09 (A05) (B05)
+24A
Terminal module B#2
CE70 (B01) (A01)
CE57 (B01) (A01)
X243.2 X243.3 X243.4 X243.5 X243.6 X243.7
X244.0 X244.1 X244.2 X244.3 X244.4 X244.5 X244.6 X244.7
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
(A02)
(A02)
(B02)
(B02)
(A03)
(A03)
(B03)
(B03)
(A04)
(A04)
(B04)
(B04)
(A05)
(A05)
(23) XT70B(1) XT70A(6)
(B05)
(B05)
(7)
(A06)
(A06)
(24) (25)
(B06)
(B06)
(A07)
(A07)
(B07)
(B07)
(A08)
(A08)
(B08)
(B08)
(A09)
(A09)
(29) (11) (12)
(B09)
(B09)
(13)
(20) (14) (3) (4) XT70B(17) XT70A(22)
(26) (8) (9) (10) (27) (28)
- 34 -
0V
X243.1
RV
+24A
X243.0
XT70A (30) (19)
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
I/O module A20B-2004-0691
+24 X245.0
X245.1
X245.2
X245.3
X245.4
X245.5
X245.6
X245.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
XB1
0V
CE57 (A10)
CE70 (A10)
XT70A (18) (31)
(B10)
(B10)
(32)
(A11)
(A11)
(2) (15)
(B11)
(B11)
(16)
(A12)
(A12)
(21) XT70B(18)
(B12)
(B12)
(19)
(A13)
(A13)
XT70A(5) XT70B(2)
(B13)
(B13)
(3) +24
DICOM5
0V
+24A
Terminal module B#2
XB2
0V
(B14)
(B14)
NOTE X245.0 to X245.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to "0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM5 to 24V d.c., the logic of the DI signal can be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the cable, the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM5 to 0V whenever possible.
- 35 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Output signal (DO) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2 address enclosed in ()
DOCOM
CE56, (CE57) (A24),(B24) (A25),(B25)
CE70 (A24),(B24) (A25),(B25)
0V
Terminal module B#1(#2)
I/O module A20B-2004-0691
XT70B (32) (16) XT70A (1)(17) XT70B (20)
(A16)
(A16)
(21)
DV
(B16)
(B16)
Y240.2 (Y242.2)
DV
(A17)
(A17)
(22) (4) (5)
Y240.3 (Y243.3)
DV
(B17)
(B17)
DV
(A18)
(A18)
DV
(B18)
(B18)
DV
(A19)
(A19)
(25) (7) (8)
DV
(B19)
(B19)
(9)
DV
(A20)
(A20)
(26) (27)
DV
(B20)
(B20)
DV
(A21)
(A21)
DV
(B21)
(B21)
DV
(A22)
(A22)
DV
(B22)
(B22)
DV
(A23)
(A23)
(31) (13) (14)
DV
(B23)
(B23)
(15)
Y240.0 (Y242.0)
External 24 VDC power supply (＋) (－)
Relay
DV Y240.1 (Y242.1)
Y240.4 (Y242.4) Y240.5 (Y242.5) Y240.6 (Y242.6) Y240.7 (Y242.7)
Y241.0 (Y243.0) Y241.1 (Y243.1) Y241.2 (Y243.2) Y241.3 (Y243.3) Y241.4 (Y243.3) Y241.5 (Y243.5) Y241.6 (Y243.6) Y241.7 (Y243.7)
Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2. It need not be connected to both #1 and #2. - 36 -
(6) (23) (24)
(28) (10) (11) (12) (29) (30)
Relay
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
5.2.4
Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)
I/O modules, terminal modules, and connection cables can be used to relay input/output signals via a screw terminal block. You can expand the number of inputs to up to 96 and the number of outputs to up to 64. In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal classification
I/O module
Terminal module
No. of signals
Signal address
Input signal (96 inputs)
I/O module B1 1st I/O module E1 (#1) 2nd I/O module E1 (#2) 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)
1st module (#1) 2nd module (#2) 3rd module (#3) 4th module (#4)
24 24 24 24
X228.0 to X230.7 X231.0 to X233.7 X234.0 to X236.7 X237.0 to X239.7
Output signal (64 outputs)
I/O module B1 1st I/O module E1 (#1) 2nd I/O module E1 (#2) 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)
1st module (#1) 2nd module (#2) 3rd module (#3) 4th module (#4)
16 16 16 16
Y228.0 to Y229.7 Y230.0 to Y231.7 Y232.0 to Y233.7 Y234.0 to Y235.7
Wiring PCB
I/O Link cable
A16B-1110-0520 JD1A Inter-module connection cable
JD1B XP150
CB150 CA52 I/O module B1 A03B-0824-C001
Flat cables
Terminal module #1 A03B-0815-C020
CA53 XP150
CB150 CA52
Terminal module #2 A03B-0815-C020
1st I/O module E1 (#1) A03B-0824-C003 CA53
XP150
CB150 CA52 2nd I/O module E1 (#2) A03B-0824-C003
Terminal module #3 A03B-0815-C020
CA53 XP150
CB150 CA52
Terminal module #4 A03B-0815-C020
3rd I/O module E1 (#3) A03B-0824-C003
- 37 -
24 V d.c. external power supply 1 24 V d.c. external power supply 2 (Both are additionally required.)
24 inputs (X228.0 to X230.7) 16 outputs (Y228.0 to Y229.7)
24 inputs (X231.0 to X233.7) 16 outputs (Y230.0 to Y231.7)
24 inputs (X234.0 to X236.7) 16 outputs (Y232.0 to Y233.7)
24 inputs (X237.0 to X239.7) 16 outputs (Y234.0 to Y235.7)
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Mounting diagram Flat cables
I/O module B1 A03B-0824-C001
3rd I/O module E1 (#3) A03B-0824-C003
2nd I/O module E1 (#2) A03B-0824-C003
- 38 -
1st I/O module E1 (#1) A03B-0824-C003
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #1 connected to I/O module B1 XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
+24V2 +24V2 0V Y229.1 Y228.1 0V Y229.3 Y228.3 0V Y229.5 Y228.5 X229.0 Y229.7 Y228.7 X229.2 X230.1 X228.1 X229.4 X230.3 X228.3 X229.6 X230.5 X228.5 X230.7 X228.7
B1 Y229.0 B2 Y228.0 B3 0V B4 Y229.2 B5 Y228.2 B6 0V B7 Y229.4 B8 Y228.4 B9 DICOM0 B10 Y229.6 B11 Y228.6 B12 X229.1 B13 X230.0 B14 X228.0 B15 X229.3 B16 X230.2 B17 X228.2 B18 X229.5 B19 X230.4 B20 X228.4 B21 X229.7 B22 X230.6 B23 X228.6 B24 +24V1 B25 +24V1
Number of signals and addresses 24 inputs (X228.0 to X230.7) 16 outputs (Y228.0 to Y229.7)
XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0V DICOM X228.2 X228.3 DICOM X228.6 X228.7 +24V2 X229.2 X229.3 +24V2 X229.6 X229.7 +24V2 X230.2 X230.3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
+24V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DICOM X228.0 X228.1 DICOM X228.4 X228.5 +24V2 X229.0 X229.1 +24V2 X229.4 X229.5 +24V2 X230.0 X230.1
+24V2 X230.6 X230.7 0V Y228.2 Y228.3 0V Y228.6 Y228.7 0V Y229.2 Y229.3 0V Y229.6 Y229.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24V2 X230.4 X230.5 0V Y228.0 Y228.1 0V Y228.4 Y228.5 0V Y229.0 Y229.1 0V Y229.4 Y229.5 +24V1
NOTE +24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1. +24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 39 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #2 connected to 1st I/O module E1 (#1) XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
+24V2 +24V2 0V Y231.1 Y230.1 0V Y231.3 Y230.3 0V Y231.5 Y230.5 X232.0 Y231.7 Y230.7 X232.2 X233.1 X231.1 X232.4 X233.3 X231.3 X232.6 X233.5 X231.5 X233.7 X231.7
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
Y231.0 Y230.0 0V Y231.2 Y230.2 0V Y231.4 Y230.4 DICOM0 Y231.6 Y230.6 X232.1 X233.0 X231.0 X232.3 X233.2 X231.2 X232.5 X233.4 X231.4 X232.7 X233.6 X231.6 +24V1 +24V1
Number of signals and addresses 24 inputs (X231.0 to X233.7) 16 outputs (Y230.0 to Y231.7)
XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 17 1 0V 18 2 DICOM 19 3 X231.2 20 4 X231.3 21 5 DICOM 22 6 X231.6 23 7 X231.7 24 8 +24V2 25 9 X232.2 26 10 X232.3 27 11 +24V2 28 12 X232.6 29 13 X232.7 30 14 +24V2 31 15 X233.2 32 16 X233.3
XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
+24V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DICOM X231.0 X231.1 DICOM X231.4 X231.5 +24V2 X232.0 X232.1 +24V2 X232.4 X232.5 +24V2 X233.0 X233.1
+24V2 X233.6 X233.7 0V Y230.2 Y230.3 0V Y230.6 Y230.7 0V Y231.2 Y231.3 0V Y231.6 Y231.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24V2 X233.4 X233.5 0V Y230.0 Y230.1 0V Y230.4 Y230.5 0V Y231.0 Y231.1 0V Y231.4 Y231.5 +24V1
NOTE +24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1. +24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 40 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #3 connected to 2nd I/O module E1 (#2) XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
+24V2 +24V2 0V Y233.1 Y232.1 0V Y233.3 Y232.3 0V Y233.5 Y232.5 X235.0 Y233.7 Y232.7 X234.2 X236.1 X234.1 X235.4 X236.3 X234.3 X235.6 X236.5 X234.5 X236.7 X234.7
B1 Y233.0 B2 Y232.0 B3 0V B4 Y233.2 B5 Y232.2 B6 0V B7 Y233.4 B8 Y232.4 B9 DICOM0 B10 Y233.6 B11 Y232.6 B12 X235.1 B13 X236.0 B14 X234.0 B15 X235.3 B16 X236.2 B17 X234.2 B18 X235.5 B19 X236.4 B20 X234.4 B21 X235.7 B22 X236.6 B23 X234.6 B24 +24V1 B25 +24V1
Number of signals and addresses 24 inputs (X234.0 to X236.7) 16 outputs (Y232.0 to Y233.7)
XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0V DICOM X234.2 X234.3 DICOM X234.6 X234.7 +24V2 X235.2 X235.3 +24V2 X235.6 X235.7 +24V2 X236.2 X236.3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
+24V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DICOM X234.0 X234.1 DICOM X234.4 X234.5 +24V2 X235.0 X235.1 +24V2 X235.4 X235.5 +24V2 X236.0 X236.1
+24V2 X236.6 X236.7 0V Y232.2 Y232.3 0V Y232.6 Y232.7 0V Y233.2 Y233.3 0V Y233.6 Y233.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24V2 X236.4 X236.5 0V Y232.0 Y232.1 0V Y232.4 Y232.5 0V Y233.0 Y233.1 0V Y233.4 Y233.5 +24V1
NOTE +24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1. +24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 41 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Connector table of terminal module #4 connected to 3rd I/O module E1 (#3) XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
+24V2 +24V2 0V Y235.1 Y234.1 0V Y235.3 Y234.3 0V Y235.5 Y234.5 X238.0 Y235.7 Y234.7 X238.2 X239.1 X237.1 X238.4 X239.3 X237.3 X238.6 X239.5 X237.5 X239.7 X237.7
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25
Y235.0 Y234.0 0V Y235.2 Y234.2 0V Y235.4 Y234.4 DICOM0 Y235.6 Y234.6 X238.1 X239.0 X237.0 X238.3 X239.2 X237.2 X238.5 X239.4 X237.4 X238.7 X239.6 X237.6 +24V1 +24V1
XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0V DICOM X237.2 X237.3 DICOM X237.6 X237.7 +24V2 X238.2 X238.3 +24V2 X238.6 X238.7 +24V2 X239.2 X239.3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Number of signals and addresses 24 inputs (X237.0 to X239.7) 16 outputs (Y234.0 to Y235.7)
XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)
+24V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DICOM X237.0 X237.1 DICOM X237.4 X237.5 +24V2 X238.0 X238.1 +24V2 X238.4 X238.5 +24V2 X239.0 X239.1
+24V2 X239.6 X239.7 0V Y234.2 Y234.3 0V Y234.6 Y234.7 0V Y235.2 Y235.3 0V Y235.6 Y235.7 0V
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
+24V2 X239.4 X239.5 0V Y234.0 Y234.1 0V Y234.4 Y234.5 0V Y235.0 Y235.1 0V Y235.4 Y235.5 +24V1
NOTE +24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1. +24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages. - 42 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
< Input signal (DI) circuit diagram > Connector panel I/O module
Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
Terminal module XP150 XT150B (B24) (32) (B25) XB1 0V XT150A +24 (17)
(42)
(B14)
(43)
(A17)
(44)
(B17)
(45)
(A20)
(46)
(B20)
(47)
(A23)
(48)
(B23)
(49)
(A25)
(18) (19)
Xm+1.1 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7
RV RV RV RV RV RV RV RV
+24V2
(7) XB2
0V
(24)
(B09)
(25)
(A12)
(26)
(B12)
(27)
(A15)
(28)
(B15)
(29)
(A18)
(30)
(B18)
(31)
(A21)
(29) (11) (12)
(32)
(B21)
(13)
(19),(20), (21),(22), (23)
(A03),(B03), (A06),(B06), (A09)
XT150A (1), XT150B (16)
- 43 -
0V
DC24V Power 2
(23) (5) (6)
(24) (25) (26) (8) (9) (10) (27) (28)
+24V2
Xm+1.0
+24V1
(4) (21) (22)
+24 DICOM0
DC24V Power 1
(20) (2) (3)
0V
+24V1
CB150 (18) (50)
0V
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
Terminal module
+24V2
Connector panel I/O module
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
XP150 (B13)
XT150A (30) (31)
(11)
(A16)
(32)
(12)
(B16)
(14) (15)
(13)
(A19)
(14)
(B19)
(16) XT150B (17) (18)
(15)
(A22)
(19)
(16)
(B22)
(1) (2)
(17)
(A24)
(3)
+24V2
Xm+2.7
RV
CB150 (10)
Basic module: Xm = 228 Expansion module 1:Xm = 231 Expansion module 2:Xm = 234 Expansion module 3:Xm = 237
NOTE Xm+0.1 to Xm+0.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to "0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM to +24V, the logic of the DI signal can be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the cable, the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM to 0V whenever possible. The setting terminals are factory-set as follows: Setting terminal XB1: +24 Setting terminal XB2: 0V
- 44 -
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
< Output signal (DO) circuit diagram >
+24V2
+24V2 0V
Terminal module
Connector panel I/O module
CB150 (01),(33)
XP150 (A01),(A02)
(34)
(B02)
(21)
DV
(35)
(A05)
DV
(36)
(B05)
(22) (4) (5)
DV
(37)
(A08)
DV
(38)
(B08)
DV
(39)
(A11)
DV
(40)
(B11)
(25) (7) (8)
DV
(41)
(A14)
(9)
DV
(02)
(B01)
(26) (27)
DV
(03)
(A04)
DV
(04)
(B04)
DV
(05)
(A07)
DV
(06)
(B07)
DV
(07)
(A10)
DV
(08)
(B10)
(31) (13) (14)
DV
(09)
(A13)
(15)
Yn+0.0
XT150B (20)
Relay
DV Yn+0.1 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7
Basic module: Yn = 228 Expansion module 1:Yn = 230 Expansion module 2:Yn = 232 Expansion module 3:Yn = 234
- 45 -
(6) (23) (24)
(28) (10) (11) (12) (29) (30)
Relay
5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.5
B-85314EN-1/01
Optional I/O Module Connection JD1A
Wiring PCB
Optional I/O modules must be connected in series by using the I/O Link interface. Connect the modules in the following sequence: In the case of standard setting, connect the modules in the sequence indicated below. Wiring PCB: JD1A | Group 0: I/O Unit Model-A | Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit | Group 2: Additional I/O-1 | Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operator’s Panel
Example: I/O Link Connection Unit and additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel. Wiring PCB: JD1A | Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit | Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operator’s Panel
• •
Connect the modules in the ascending order of group numbers starting from the connector panel. Unused modules need not be connected.
5.2.6
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used
When using optional I/O modules, set the following parameters: K932#0=1 I/O Unit Model-A K932#1=1 I/O Link connection unit K932#2=1 Additional I/O-1 K932#3=1 Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel
SUPPLEMENT The screen for setting keep relays in the nine hundreds can be displayed by pressing the emergency stop button. - 46 -
6.ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC
B-85314EN-1/01
6
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC
The following addresses are available to custom PMC. Address type
Symbol
X
---
Y
---
Function Input from external device to custom PMC Output from custom PMC to external device Work register Input from system ladder program to custom PMC Output from custom PMC to system ladder program Alarm operator message display request Non-volatile memory (allows setting of parameters) Non-volatile register (allows setting of parameters)
R SI**_* SO**_* A
---
D
---
K
---
Editing Input only Input and output Input and output Input only
Address X0.0 to X5.7 (CH1) X200.0 to X327.7 (CH2) Y0.0 to Y3.7 (CH1) Y200.0 to Y327.7 (CH2) R2000.0-R2999.7 See Chapter 12.
Input and output Input and output
A100.0 to A149.7
Input and output
D7000 to D7999 D7000.0 to D7999.7 K35#0 to K44#7
Input and output
Timers and counters can use the following numbers. Timer/Counter Timer
No.
Variable timer Fixed timer
121 to 200 (T240 to T398) 1 to 140 40 to 69 (C156 to C274)
Counter
The following subprogram numbers can be used: Subprogram number
P1500 to P5000
The following special auxiliary relay numbers can be used: Common to DIFU/DIFD
1 to 100
- 47 -
7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
7
B-85314EN-1/01
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
To input alphabetic characters, use the corresponding soft keys (in the case of the standard operator's panel) Press the key on the operator's panel.
× Press Soft keys are displayed as follows. [In half mode] O
G
F
M
S
T
X
Y
Z
;
H
I
J
K
P
Q
R
<
>
;
N
/
B
C
D
FULL
ABC/ abc
ALTER
DELETE
;
[In full mode] A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
SPACE
<
>
;
+
-
*
/
=
?
#
&
@
;
(
)
[
]
,
"
'
_
\
;
:
%
$
!
∼
HALF
ABC/ abc
ALTER
DELETE
;
×
×
Use the rightmost and leftmost soft keys to change the alphabetic characters.
- 48 -
7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS
B-85314EN-1/01
To switch between half and full modes, use the procedure below. [Switch from half mode to full mode] N
/
B
C
D
FULL
ABC/ abc
ALTER
DELETE
;
ALTER
DELETE
;
× Press [Switch from full mode to half mode] :
%
$
!
∼
HALF
ABC/ abc
× Press
× Press To leave alphabetic character input mode, press the key again on the operator's panel.
- 49 -
8.EDITING
8
B-85314EN-1/01
EDITING
You can edit ladder and other programs on the PMC screen.
CAUTION With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. When editing ladder programs, messages, symbols, comments, and so forth, check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen. Never perform editing or deleting with the first PMC.
8.1
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION
[Turn the power ON] ↓ [Press the emergency stop button] ↓ [Display the PMC screen] (If the QUICK screen is displayed, press the button on the operator's panel to display the CNC screen.) Display the CNC SYSTEM-SYSTEM screen.
→
or
Press the above keys: ↓ Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times until the following soft keys are displayed:
Each soft key corresponds to functions as listed below. Display a desired screen. PMC MAINTE: PMC LADDER: PMC CONFIG:
Displays the signal status, and sets the trace function and PMC parameters. Lists and edits a ladder program. Lists and edits titles, messages, and comments.
- 50 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
8.2
EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS
8.2.1
Switching to the Edit Screen
[Switch to the ladder diagram screen] Press soft key [PMC LADDER].
↓
Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
↓ Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if necessary.)
↓ Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 51 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Select the edit area] Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) by using the cursor keys on the operator's panel then press the soft key [ZOOM].
If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [LADDER].
- 52 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR] To switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR, press soft key [EDIT] on PMC LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR. (The [EDIT] key is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)
8.2.2
Editing Ladder Programs
Ladder programs may be created between "SUB71" and "SUB72".
May be created in this area.
Press the rightmost soft key [+] to change the displayed soft keys.
CAUTION Never delete or edit functional instructions "SUB71" and "SUB72". Do not create ladder programs outside the "SUB71" to "SUB72" area. - 53 -
8.EDITING Soft key LIST SEARCH MENU CREATE ZOOM
CREATE NET AUTO SELECT
DELETE
CUT COPY PASTE
CHANGE ADRS ADRS MAP UPDATE
RESTRE
SCREEN SETING START/STOP CANCEL EDIT
EXIT EDIT
B-85314EN-1/01
Menu on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen Function Lists ladder programs. (Not used.) Displays the search menu in the soft key area. Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to add a new net at the cursor position. Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder program. If the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program will be executed immediately. Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to edit the net at the cursor position. Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter numbers. Used to specify more than one net to perform an edit operation such as [DELETE], [CUT], and [COPY]. Press soft key [SELECT] to specify the start of the range to be selected, then use the cursor movement keys or the search function to specify the end of the range. After selecting nets, press the desired edit soft key to perform that edit operation. Deletes a selected net. When deleted, the net will be lost. If you want to restore the deleted net, you must use soft key [RESTRE] to return the entire ladder program to the state in which it was before the edit operation. Removes a selected net and places it in the clipboard. To paste the net, use soft key [PASTE]. Makes a copy of a selected net and place it in the clipboard. To paste the copy, use soft key [PASTE]. Inserts the net placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY] at the cursor position. Pressing soft key [PASTE] when a net is selected with [SELECT] causes the selected net to be replaced by the one placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY]. Displays the address conversion soft keys to use the address conversion function. Calls the ADDRESS MAP screen to check the reference of the used addresses. Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder program. When the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program will be executed immediately. Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to the state in which it was when the system switched to the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or to the state in which it was when [UPDATE] was last used. After having performed a wrong edit operation, you can use this key if recovery is difficult to accomplish. Calls the setup screen of the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. You can change various types of settings related to ladder diagram edit operations. Controls the execution of the ladder program. Soft key [RUN] starts the execution of the ladder program, and soft key [STOP] stops its execution. Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to the state in which it was when the system switched to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or when [UPDATE] was last used. Displays the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far and terminates editing. You cannot move to another screen during edit operation of a ladder diagram by pressing any function key such as the SYSTEM key unless you terminate editing.
- 54 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Create/add a new net] (1) Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR. (See Subsection 8.2.1.) Position the cursor on SUB72. Alternatively, position the cursor on the net immediately below the position at which you want to add a new net. Press soft key [CREATE].
→
The PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen is displayed. (2) Create a ladder program using the variety of instructions displayed as soft keys. To set an address, press the key on the operator's panel; this causes alphabetic letters to be displayed as soft keys, enabling you to enter alphabetic letters using these soft keys. For the operator's panel with the full keyboard: Use the alphabetic keys on the operator's panel to enter alphabetic letters.
- 55 -
8.EDITING Instruction
B-85314EN-1/01
Menu on the NET EDITOR screen Function Reads the signal state of a specified address. Reads the signal state of a specified address and inverts it. Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address. Inverts the state of a logic operation result and writes it to a specified address.
FUNC
Selects a functional instruction. Connects one step to another. Deletes a basic or functional instruction. Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Left side of an instruction) Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Right side of an instruction)
AUTO
Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter numbers. Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address to keep it. Resets a kept output.
TABLE
RESTRE NEXT NET
INSLIN
INSCLM APPCLM
CANCEL EDIT EXIT
Displayed if the cursor is positioned on the functional instruction COD (SUB7) or CODB (SUB27). It is used to change the contents of the data table of these functional instructions. Returns the currently edited net to the state in which it was when editing started. Terminates the editing of the current net and allows you to edit the next net. When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [ZOOM] on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates changing the current net and enables the next net to be edited. When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [CREATE NET] on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates creating the current net, inserts the created net, and immediately enters the status in which a new net is created (empty net status). Inserts a blank line at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram located below the cursor position will be shifted downward by one line. If a blank line is inserted in the middle of a functional instruction, the functional instruction will be expanded vertically, expanding the space between input conditions. Inserts a blank column at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the right of the cursor position moves right one column. Inserts a blank column at the right of the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the right of the cursor position moves right one column and the ladder diagram is extended horizontally if necessary. Returns the net currently being edited to the state at the start of the editing and displays the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. Analyzes the net being edited and stores it in the ladder program. If any error is found in the net, the NET EDITOR screen remains displayed and an error message is displayed.
- 56 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) To enter a functional instruction, first press soft key [FUNC]. Then, position the cursor on the functional instruction you want to enter and press soft key [SELECT]. This causes the functional instruction to be inserted into the NET EDITOR screen, allowing you to specify various parameters (timer No. and time in the case of SUB24 fixed timer).
→
(4) Ladder programs such as those shown below cannot be created.
The output coil has conditional branching.
→
×
{
- 57 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
[Modify the ladder program] (1) Delete an entered instruction: Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key
.
To delete an instruction entered in parallel, follow the procedure below. Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key Then, press soft key
.
→
- 58 -
.
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
•
To delete a functional instruction, follow the procedure below. Position the cursor on the desired functional instruction No. Press soft key . This causes the functional instruction to be deleted, separating nets. Use soft key the nets.
→
•
To delete a net, follow the procedure below. Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the net you want to delete, and press soft key [DELETE].
- 59 -
to connect
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) Add an instruction: Call the NET EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the location where you want to add an instruction. Press soft key
or
to add an instruction, then set an address.
If required, before adding a functional instruction, use soft key
to delete the net from the
location at which the instruction is to be added, reserving the space for the functional instruction.
- 60 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
•
To add a functional instruction between instructions or between nets, follow the procedure below. Press the rightmost soft key. This changes the soft key menu. To add an instruction between nets or between instructions entered in parallel: Move the cursor below the position at which you want to add an instruction, then press soft key [INSLIN]. To add an instruction between instructions entered in series: Move the cursor to the right or left of the position at which an instruction is to be added. To insert an instruction to the right of the cursor position, press soft key [APPCLM]; to insert it to the left of the cursor position, press soft key [INSCLM]. Add an instruction to the created space.
- 61 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Copy or move a net. Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the net you want to copy. Press soft key [SELECT]. Use the cursor or other keys to specify the copy area. After specifying the area, press soft key [COPY]. Move the cursor to the position at which you want to copy the net, and press soft key [PASTE].
(4) Switch the display format: Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Press the rightmost soft key, and the soft key menu will change. Press soft key [+]. This allows you to change the various settings for ladder diagram display.
- 62 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Item ADDRESS NOTATION
FUNCTION STYLE
SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT
SHOW COMMENT OF COIL
SHOW CURSOR
SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER
WRAP SEARCH ENABLED
PROGRAM LIST ORDER FRAME NET ON SUBPROGRAM DISPLAY HEAVY LINES IN LADDER DIAGRAM ON/OFF CHANGE OF RELAY SHAPE
ADDRESS COLOR DIAGRAM COLOR ACTIVE RELAY COLOR PARAMETER COLOR COMMENT COLOR
Description Used to specify whether to display addresses in the ladder diagram as symbols or addresses. Those addresses for which no symbols have been defined will always be displayed as addresses. Used to switch the functional instruction display format. COMPACT: Reduces the functional instruction display area to a minimum. The address parameter monitor is not displayed. WIDE: Reserves a wide area for displaying the current address parameter value monitor. TALL: Reserves a tall area for displaying the current address parameter value monitor. Used to switch the format in which comments are to be displayed below contacts. NONE: Displays no comments. This allows more contacts to be displayed on the screen. 1 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 1-line format. 2 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 2-line format. Used to specify whether to display comments at coil positions. YES: Displays comments on the right of the ladder diagram. NO: Displays no comments. This allows more relays to be displayed horizontally. Comments can be displayed. Used to specify whether to display the cursor. YES: Displays the cursor. The cursor movement keys are sued to move the cursor. For a search, the cursor will move to a found object such as a relay. NO: Does not display the cursor. The up and down cursor movement keys are used to directly move the screen display position. Used to select a method of assigning numbers to the nets to be displayed. LOCAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of the subprogram currently opened. The net number display is the display range/number of nets in the entire subprogram currently opened. GLOBAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of all ladder programs (second PMC). The net number display is the display range/subprogram range. Used to specify whether to continue the search starting at the beginning of the ladder program when the end of the ladder program is reached in a search process. YES: If the end of the ladder program is reached in a forward search, continues the search at the beginning. If the beginning is reached in a backward search, continues the search at the end. NO: At the point when the end or beginning of the ladder program is reached, assumes the search to be a failure if no match is found, displaying an error message. Used to specify whether to display the subprograms on the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen in the order of program numbers or symbols. Used to specify whether to display functional instructions END1, END2, SP, and SPE when the contents of a program are displayed using the [ZOOM] key on the PROGRAM LIST MONITOR/EDITOR screen. Used to specify the thickness of the lines in the ladder diagram. YES: Uses heavy lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little larger. NO: Uses light lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little smaller. Used to specify whether to change the shape of each relay according to its status. YES: Changes the shape of each relay according to its status. This setting is valid only when "HEAVY LINES IN LADDER DIAGRAM" is set to "YES". NO: Does not change the shape of each relay. Used to set the color of symbols and addresses. Used to set the color of the ladder diagram. Used to set the color of a relay when it is ON. Used to set the color of functional instruction parameters in the monitor display section. Used to set the color of comments.
- 63 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Pressing soft key [INIT] causes all settings to be changed to their defaults. After changing settings, press soft key [EXIT] to return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR or NET EDITOR screen. (5) Search for an instruction: Press soft key [SEARCH]. This changes the soft key menu.
Item TOPBTM SEARCH
W-SRCH F-SRCH PREV NEXT GLOBAL
Description Causes a jump to the beginning of the ladder program. If the beginning is already displayed, causes a jump to the end. Searches for the address or net number corresponding to an entered character string, displaying it if it is found. If a number is entered, the system interprets it as a net number. If a character string other than a number is entered, the system examines to see if the character string has been defined as a symbol. If it has been defined as a symbol, the system searches for the address represented by that symbol. If it has not been defined as a symbol, the system interprets it as a character string representing an address. If succeeding in interpreting it correctly, the system searches for the address. Searches for the write coil in which the entered character string is used. Accepts a functional instruction No. or functional instruction name as input and searches for the functional instruction. Repeats the last successful search operation in the backward direction. Repeats the last successful search operation in the forward direction. Switches the search target between all ladder programs (second PMC) and the subprogram currently opened. The current search target is displayed at the rightmost position. The system ladder programs (LV1, LV2, P1-P1499) are protected, so that the system ladder programs cannot be search targets even if "GLOBAL" is selected.
Pressing soft key [EXIT] causes the search menu to be exited.
- 64 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
8.3
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES CAUTION English messages are set in this section because the multi-language display function is used for ladder messages.
Press the emergency stop button. Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].
Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)
Press soft key [MESAGE].
Press soft key [(OPRT)].
Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state).
The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program stops.)
- 65 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
The MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.
Use soft key [SEARCH], keys and the keys appropriately to search for the address to which a message is to be entered.
- 66 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
Position the cursor on the target address and press soft key [ZOOM].
Position the cursor on the number setting field and enter the alarm or message number. Move the cursor to the message setting field, enter the message, and press soft key [EXIT ZOOM]. After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT]. The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)
- 67 -
8.EDITING
8.4
B-85314EN-1/01
EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS
Press the emergency stop button. Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].
Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)
Press soft key [SYMBOL].
Press oft key [(OPRT)].
Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)
The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program stops.)
- 68 -
8.EDITING
B-85314EN-1/01
The SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.
If you want to change a symbol or comment at an address, use soft key [SEARCH]. If you want to add a new symbol or comment, use soft key [NEW ENTRY]. Move the cursor to move the yellow cursor from the symbol field to the program field. Set required data in each field. After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT]. The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)
- 69 -
8.EDITING
8.5
B-85314EN-1/01
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION
Edited ladder programs and other data are lost if you just turn the power off. After editing, write the data to the flash ROM. Use the following procedure: Press the emergency stop button. Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press soft key [I/O].
The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed. Select the following items and press soft key [(OPRT)]: PMC DEVICE FUNCTION KIND OF DATA
= “PMC2” = “FLASH ROM” = “WRITE” = “SEQUENCE PROGRAM”
Press soft key [EXEC]. Writing edited data to the flash ROM starts. "COMPLETE" is displayed to indicate completion.
- 70 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
9
CONFIRMATION
9.1
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS
You can display the ladder program status screen. Use the following procedure: Press soft key [PMC LADDER].
↓ Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
↓ Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if necessary.)
↓ Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 71 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [ZOOM]. If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [LADDER] or press [(OPRT)] then [ZOOM]. The ladder diagram screen is displayed. ↓
Soft key LIST SEARCH MENU SWITCH SWITCH PMC SCREEN SETING
Function Lists ladder programs. Displays the search menu in the soft key area. Switches to the select monitor screen. Switches to the first PMC, second PMC, and dual check. Calls the setup screen of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. The settings are the same as those on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
- 72 -
9.CONFIRMATION
B-85314EN-1/01
9.2
SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS
You can display the logic status of each signal. Use the following procedure: Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].
Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)
Press soft key [SIGNAL STATUS]. The SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed. "1" is displayed when the corresponding signal is ON. "0" is displayed when it is OFF. Enter the address or symbol you want to reference and press soft keys [(OPRT)] → [SEARCH], and information for that address is displayed.
CAUTION With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. If the second PMC is not selected, the signal status screen, when displayed, does not display symbols set with the custom PMC. So, check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
- 73 -
10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS
10
B-85314EN-1/01
SETTING PMC PARAMETERS CAUTION With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. However, the PMC parameters are common to the first PMC and second PMC. So, do not use addresses other than the usable ones.
To set the parameters for timers, counters, keep relays, and data tables, use the following procedure:
(Switch the operation mode to MDI mode.) × Press ↓
Press
→
or
(The CNC SETTING screen is displayed.) ↓ Press soft key [SETTING].
↓ Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to “1:ENABLE”.
↓
Press
→
or
(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.) ↓
- 74 -
10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS
B-85314EN-1/01
Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].
↓ Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again until the following soft keys are displayed.
↓ For timers: Press soft key [TIMER].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the setting time.
- 75 -
10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS
B-85314EN-1/01
For counters: Press soft key [COUNTR].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the value.
For keep relays: Press soft key [KEEP RELAY].
Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the values.
- 76 -
10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS
B-85314EN-1/01
For data tables: Press soft key [DATA].
The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed. To change the data type, position the cursor on the TYPE field and change the setting.
Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [ZOOM].
Use the cursor and page keys and soft key [SEARCH] to move the cursor, and enter the value.
- 77 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
11
INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
11.1
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN
Connect either a memory card or Handy File (RS-232C).
Press
→
or
(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.) ↓ Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].
↓ Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again and press soft key [I/O].
↓ The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.
- 78 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
Input operation (from an external device to the ROBODRILL) (1) Place the machine in the MDI mode and press the emergency stop button to place the machine in the emergency stop state. (2) On the I/O DATA screen, move the item and data selection cursors and make the following settings: Setting item PMC DEVICE FUNCTION KIND OF DATA FILE NAME
Data PMC2 MEMORY CARD / FLOPPY READ ―――(Cannot be specified.) The type of read data is automatically determined Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the file name with up to three characters for the extension). Pressing [(OPRT)] → [LIST] displays a list of files on the memory card. Position the cursor on the file you want to read and press the [SELECT] key to select the file.
(3) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Reading the file starts. When an attempt is made to read a file, the following message is displayed, asking whether to read the file: READING MESSAGE DATA (SEQUENCE PROGRAM) (PMC2) Special care must be exercised to read a sequence program or PMC parameters. * Reading an inappropriate file may cause unexpected operation of the machine. * When a sequence program is read during operation, the program automatically stops. Do you want to read this file?
To continue with the operation, press the [EXEC] key. (The ladder program being executed automatically stops.) (4) After the completion of reading in step , write each type of data to the flash ROM. Make the following settings: Setting item PMC DEVICE FUNCTION KIND OF DATA FILE NAME
Data PMC2 FLASH ROM WRITE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data) MESSAGES (for message data) ―――(Not set)
(5) Press the [(OPRT)] key → [EXEC] key to execute data writing. "COMPLETE" is displayed to indicate completion.
WARNING When data is read during the execution of a ladder program, the ladder program automatically stops. Special care must be exercised to stop a ladder program. If a ladder program is stopped at an inappropriate timing or in an inappropriate machine state, the machine may perform unexpected operation. In the ladder program stopped state, the safety mechanism and monitoring functions of the ladder program also stop. Be sure to confirm that "the machine is in an appropriate state" and that "no one is near the machine" before stopping the ladder program.
- 79 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
On the PMC I/O DATA screen, pressing soft keys [(OPRT)] → [PORT SETTING] displays the communication setting screen.
Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device) (1) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device) Setting item PMC DEVICE FUNCTION KIND OF DATA FILE NAME
Data PMC2 MEMORY CARD/FLOPPY WRITE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data) MESSAGES (for message data) Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the file name with up to three characters for the extension). Pressing [(OPRT)] → [NEW FILE] specifies: PMC2_LAD.000 (for ladder data) PMC2_MSG.000 (for message data)
(2) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Outputting a message file starts, with the specified file name.
CAUTION No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, no message file can be output.
- 80 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
11.2
OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN
(1) Turn the power OFF. (2) Insert a memory card into the memory card insertion slot located on the left side of the LCD. (Make sure that the label on the memory card is facing to the right, and push it in until it snaps into place.) (3) Press and hold down the soft keys shown in the figure below, and turn on the power ON. (Keep holding down the keys until the screen shown under (4) is displayed.) × × [Turn power ON while holding them down] (4) The boot screen is displayed. SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
60W4 - 05
1.END 2.USER DATA LOADING 3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING 4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK 5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE 7.SRAM DATA UTILITY 8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(5) Input operation (from a memory card to the ROBODRILL) (a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "2.USER DATA LOADING" and press the [SELECT] key. SYSTEM DATA LOADING MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123) 1 PMC2.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:56 2 PMC2_MSG.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:58 3 END
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(b) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press [SELECT]: Example: "PMC2.MEM" (for ladder data) "PMC2_MSG.MEM" (for message data) (c) When a file is selected, the message "LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO" is displayed, asking whether to read the file. Press [YES]. - 81 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
(d) When reading terminates normally, the message "LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY." is displayed. Press the [SELECT] key. (e) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select "END" and press the [SELECT] key. You exit the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen. (6) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to a memory card) (a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE" and press the [SELECT] key. (b) On the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen, press the rightmost soft key [>] and display the page containing either of the following items: "PMC2" (for ladder data) "M2PMCMSG" (for message data) SYSTEM DATA SAVE FROM DIRECTORY 1 NC BAS-1(0008) 2 NC BAS-2(0008) 3 NC BAS-3(0008) 4 NC BAS-4(0008) 5 DGD0SRVO(0003) 6 PS0B (0006) 7 PMC1 (0003) 8 END *** MESSAGE *** SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [SELECT][ YES
][
NO
][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(c) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press [SELECT]: "PMC2" (for ladder data) "M2PMCMSG" (for message data) (d) The confirmation message "SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed. Press [YES]. Outputting the message file starts. (e) When the output to the memory card terminates normally, the following message is displayed. Press the [SELECT] key. "FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY." "SAVE FILE NAME : PMC2.000" (for ladder data) "SAVE FILE NAME : M2PMCMSG.000" (for messages) When the memory card contains a file with the same name, the number of the extension is incremented by one. (***.001 - ***.002) (f) Position the cursor on "END" and press the [SELECT] key to exit the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen.
- 82 -
11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA
B-85314EN-1/01
(7) Existing the boot screen Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on "1.END" and press the [SELECT] key. SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
60W4 - 05
1.END 2.USER DATA LOADING 3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING 4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK 5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE 7.SRAM DATA UTILITY 8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed. Press the [YES] key. This causes you to exit the boot screen, displaying the CNC or QUICK screen.
CAUTION No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, M2PMCMSG cannot be output.
- 83 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12 Address
B-85314EN-1/01
INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS [System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Symbol
Note
R 1300.0 R 1300.1 R 1300.2
SI0_0 SI0_1 SI0_2
R 1300.3 R 1300.4 R 1300.5 R 1300.6 R 1300.7
SI0_3 SI0_4 SI0_5 SI0_6 SI0_7
Always ON. Always OFF. ON in a single scanning cycle at the start of operation. 1.0-second clock pulse 0.1-second clock pulse 0.5-second clock pulse (Not used) (Not used)
R 1301.0 R 1301.1 R 1301.2 R 1301.3 R 1301.4 R 1301.5 R 1301.6 R 1301.7
SI1_0 SI1_1 SI1_2 SI1_3 SI1_4 SI1_5 SI1_6 SI1_7
(Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)
R 1302.0 R 1302.1 R 1302.2 R 1302.3 R 1302.4 R 1302.5 R 1302.6 R 1302.7
SI2_0 SI2_1 SI2_2 SI2_3 SI2_4 SI2_5 SI2_6 SI2_7
Selected program No. 2∧0 Selected program No. 2∧1 Selected program No. 2∧2 Selected program No. 2∧3 Selected program No. 2∧4 Selected program No. 2∧5 Selected program No. 2∧6 Selected program No. 2∧7
12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
R 1303.0 R 1303.1 R 1303.2 R 1303.3 R 1303.4 R 1303.5 R 1303.6 R 1303.7
SI3_0 SI3_1 SI3_2 SI3_3 SI3_4 SI3_5 SI3_6 SI3_7
Selected program No. 2∧8 Selected program No. 2∧9 Selected program No. 2∧10 Selected program No. 2∧11 Selected program No. 2∧12 Selected program No. 2∧13 Selected program No. 2∧14 Selected program No. 2∧15
12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
R 1304.0 R 1304.1 R 1304.2 R 1304.3 R 1304.4 R 1304.5 R 1304.6 R 1304.7
SI4_0 SI4_1 SI4_2 SI4_3 SI4_4 SI4_5 SI4_6 SI4_7
Tool No. 2∧0 Tool No. 2∧1 Tool No. 2∧2 Tool No. 2∧3 Tool No. 2∧4 Tool No. 2∧5 Tool No. 2∧6 Tool No. 2∧7
12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
- 84 -
12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1305.0 R 1305.1 R 1305.2 R 1305.3 R 1305.4 R 1305.5 R 1305.6 R 1305.7
SI5_0 SI5_1 SI5_2 SI5_3 SI5_4 SI5_5 SI5_6 SI5_7
/M code BCD 2∧0*1 M80 output/M code BCD 2∧1*1 M81 output/M code BCD 2∧2*1 M82 output/M code BCD 2∧3*1 M83 output/M code BCD 2∧0*10 M84 output/M code BCD 2∧1*10 M85 output/M code BCD 2∧2*10 M86 output/M code BCD 2∧3*10
12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6
R 1306.0 R 1306.1 R 1306.2 R 1306.3 R 1306.4 R 1306.5 R 1306.6 R 1306.7
SI6_0 SI6_1 SI6_2 SI6_3 SI6_4 SI6_5 SI6_6 SI6_7
M87 output/data read request M88 output/distribution completion M89 output/BCD data parity check
12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6 12.7/12.6
R 1307.0 R 1307.1 R 1307.2 R 1307.3 R 1307.4 R 1307.5 R 1307.6 R 1307.7
SI7_0 SI7_1 SI7_2 SI7_3 SI7_4 SI7_5 SI7_6 SI7_7
Machine status output 1 (END1 output) Machine status output 2 (END2 output) Machine status output 3 (END3 output) Cycle start (in progress) Condition of feed hold Condition of alarm Condition of reset Condition of emergency stop
12.16 12.16 12.16 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
R 1308.0 R 1308.1 R 1308.2 R 1308.3 R 1308.4 R 1308.5 R 1308.6 R 1308.7
SI8_0 SI8_1 SI8_2 SI8_3 SI8_4 SI8_5 SI8_6 SI8_7
MEM mode selection MDI mode selection Handle mode selection Jog mode selection Reference mode selection Edit mode selection Program stoppage Production completion
12.14 12.14 12.14 12.14 12.14 12.14 12.2 12.15
R 1309.0 R 1309.1 R 1309.2 R 1309.3 R 1309.4 R 1309.5 R 1309.6 R 1309.7
SI9_0 SI9_1 SI9_2 SI9_3 SI9_4 SI9_5 SI9_6 SI9_7
End of selection (Reserved) Battery alarm End of program Machine interior coolant output ON Splash guard door closed state Automatic side door closed state Automatic side door open state
12.5
/M code BCD 2∧0*100 /M code BCD 2∧1*100 /M code BCD 2∧2*100 /M code BCD 2∧3*100
- 85 -
12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6
12.2 12.18 12.17 12.19 12.20 12.20
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1310.0 R 1310.1 R 1310.2 R 1310.3 R 1310.4 R 1310.5 R 1310.6 R 1310.7
SI10_0 SI10_1 SI10_2 SI10_3 SI10_4 SI10_5 SI10_6 SI10_7
Door open (M60) Automatic door closed state Automatic door open state Warning level detection Breakage level detection Spindle stop Auto mode Tool life end (tool group)
12.3 12.3 12.3 12.21 12.21 12.22 12.2 12.11
R 1311.0 R 1311.1 R 1311.2 R 1311.3 R 1311.4 R 1311.5 R 1311.6 R 1311.7
SI11_0 SI11_1 SI11_2 SI11_3 SI11_4 SI11_5 SI11_6 SI11_7
Coolant output ON Automatic door open request output Automatic door close request output Air blow output Production completion 1 Production completion 2 Advance notice of tool life Center through coolant output ON
12.17 12.3 12.3 12.17 12.15 12.15 12.11 12.17
R 1312.0 R 1312.1 R 1312.2 R 1312.3 R 1312.4 R 1312.5 R 1312.6 R 1312.7
SI12_0 SI12_1 SI12_2 SI12_3 SI12_4 SI12_5 SI12_6 SI12_7
Display in Japanese Display in German Display in French (Reserved) Display in Italian Display in Korean Display in Spanish Display in English
12.23 12.23 12.23 12.23 12.23 12.23 12.23
R 1313.0 R 1313.1 R 1313.2 R 1313.3 R 1313.4 R 1313.5 R 1313.6 R 1313.7
SI13_0 SI13_1 SI13_2 SI13_3 SI13_4 SI13_5 SI13_6 SI13_7
Position switch 1 Position switch 2 Position switch 3 Position switch 4 Position switch 5 Position switch 6 Position switch 7 Position switch 8
12.24 12.24 12.24 12.24 12.24 12.24 12.24 12.24
R 1314.0 R 1314.1 R 1314.2 R 1314.3 R 1314.4 R 1314.5 R 1314.6 R 1314.7
SI14_0 SI14_1 SI14_2 SI14_3 SI14_4 SI14_5 SI14_6 SI14_7
Movement along the X-axis Movement along the Y-axis Movement along the Z-axis Movement along the 4-th axis Movement along the 5-th axis Low air pressure
12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.2
Emergency stop button
12.2
- 86 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Symbol
Note
R 1315.0 R 1315.1 R 1315.2 R 1315.3 R 1315.4 R 1315.5 R 1315.6 R 1315.7
SI15_0 SI15_1 SI15_2 SI15_3 SI15_4 SI15_5 SI15_6 SI15_7
Completion of X-axis reference position return Completion of Y-axis reference position return Completion of Z-axis reference position return Completion of 4th-axis reference position return Completion of 5th-axis reference position return Completion of machining Feedrate override 100% Spindle speed override 100%
R 1316.0 R 1316.1 R 1316.2 R 1316.3 R 1316.4 R 1316.5 R 1316.6 R 1316.7
SI16_0 SI16_1 SI16_2 SI16_3 SI16_4 SI16_5 SI16_6 SI16_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R 1317.0 R 1317.1 R 1317.2 R 1317.3 R 1317.4 R 1317.5 R 1317.6 R 1317.7
SI17_0 SI17_1 SI17_2 SI17_3 SI17_4 SI17_5 SI17_6 SI17_7
Door open (M61) Door open (M62) Door open (M63) Door open (M64) Door open (M65) Alarm output 2 Operation-enabled state (Not used)
12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.10 12.2
R 1318.0 R 1318.1 R 1318.2 R 1318.3 R 1318.4 R 1318.5 R 1318.6 R 1318.7
SI18_0 SI18_1 SI18_2 SI18_3 SI18_4 SI18_5 SI18_6 SI18_7
Establishment of X-axis reference position Establishment of Y-axis reference position Establishment of Z-axis reference position Establishment of 4th-axis reference position Establishment of 5th-axis reference position Tool group reset request reception Tool group reset error
12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.11 12.11
R 1319.0
SI19_0
Completion of X-axis reference position return
R 1319.1
SI19_1
Completion of Y-axis reference position return
R 1319.2
SI19_2
Completion of Z-axis reference position return
R 1319.3
SI19_3
Completion of 4th-axis reference position return
R 1319.4
SI19_4
Completion of 5th-axis reference position return
(When ZPX is ON at the completion of G27 or G28) (When ZPY is ON at the completion of G27 or G28) (When ZPZ is ON at the completion of G27 or G28) (When ZP4 is ON at the completion of G27 or G28) (When ZP5 is ON at the completion of G27 or G28)
R 1319.5 R 1319.6 R 1319.7
SI19_5 SI19_6 SI19_7
- 87 -
12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.18 12.2 12.2
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1320.0 R 1320.1 R 1320.2 R 1320.3 R 1320.4 R 1320.5 R 1320.6 R 1320.7
SI20_0 SI20_1 SI20_2 SI20_3 SI20_4 SI20_5 SI20_6 SI20_7
S command 2^0 S command 2^1 S command 2^2 S command 2^3 S command 2^4 S command 2^5 S command 2^6 S command 2^7
12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22
R 1321.0 R 1321.1 R 1321.2 R 1321.3 R 1321.4 R 1321.5 R 1321.6 R 1321.7
SI21_0 SI21_1 SI21_2 SI21_3 SI21_4 SI21_5 SI21_6 SI21_7
S command 2^8 S command 2^9 S command 2^10 S command 2^11 S command 2^12 S command 2^13 S command 2^14 S command 2^15
12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22
R 1322.0 R 1322.1 R 1322.2 R 1322.3 R 1322.4 R 1322.5 R 1322.6 R 1322.7
SI22_0 SI22_1 SI22_2 SI22_3 SI22_4 SI22_5 SI22_6 SI22_7
S command 2^16 S command 2^17 S command 2^18 S command 2^19 S command 2^20 S command 2^21 S command 2^22 S command 2^23
12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22
R 1323.0 R 1323.1 R 1323.2 R 1323.3 R 1323.4 R 1323.5 R 1323.6 R 1323.7
SI23_0 SI23_1 SI23_2 SI23_3 SI23_4 SI23_5 SI23_6 SI23_7
S command 2^24 S command 2^25 S command 2^26 S command 2^27 S command 2^28 S command 2^29 S command 2^30 S command 2^31
12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22 12.22
R 1324.0 R 1324.1 R 1324.2 R 1324.3 R 1324.4 R 1324.5 R 1324.6
SI24_0 SI24_1 SI24_2 SI24_3 SI24_4 SI24_5 SI24_6
M03 command M05 command Spindle rotation button ON Center through coolant pump on Center through coolant on Air purge on Automatic fire extinguishing device error
R 1324.7
SI24_7
Start of the automatic fire extinguishing device
12.22 12.22 12.22 12.17 12.17 12.17 ON when the automatic fire extinguishing device is faulty or the power is off. (Option) ON when the automatic fire extinguishing device starts. (Option)
- 88 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1325.0 R 1325.1 R 1325.2 R 1325.3 R 1325.4 R 1325.5 R 1325.6 R 1325.7
SI25_0 SI25_1 SI25_2 SI25_3 SI25_4 SI25_5 SI25_6 SI25_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1100) Input signal for custom macro (#1101) Input signal for custom macro (#1102) Input signal for custom macro (#1103) Input signal for custom macro (#1104) Input signal for custom macro (#1105) Input signal for custom macro (#1106) Input signal for custom macro (#1107)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1326.0 R 1326.1 R 1326.2 R 1326.3 R 1326.4 R 1326.5 R 1326.6 R 1326.7
SI26_0 SI26_1 SI26_2 SI26_3 SI26_4 SI26_5 SI26_6 SI26_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1108) Input signal for custom macro (#1109) Input signal for custom macro (#1110) Input signal for custom macro (#1111) Input signal for custom macro (#1112) Input signal for custom macro (#1113) Input signal for custom macro (#1114) Input signal for custom macro (#1115)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1327.0 R 1327.1 R 1327.2 R 1327.3 R 1327.4 R 1327.5 R 1327.6 R 1327.7
SI27_0 SI27_1 SI27_2 SI27_3 SI27_4 SI27_5 SI27_6 SI27_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1328.0 R 1328.1 R 1328.2 R 1328.3 R 1328.4 R 1328.5 R 1328.6 R 1328.7
SI28_0 SI28_1 SI28_2 SI28_3 SI28_4 SI28_5 SI28_6 SI28_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1329.0 R 1329.1 R 1329.2 R 1329.3 R 1329.4 R 1329.5 R 1329.6 R 1329.7
SI29_0 SI29_1 SI29_2 SI29_3 SI29_4 SI29_5 SI29_6 SI29_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
- 89 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1330.0 R 1330.1 R 1330.2 R 1330.3 R 1330.4 R 1330.5 R 1330.6 R 1330.7
SI30_0 SI30_1 SI30_2 SI30_3 SI30_4 SI30_5 SI30_6 SI30_7
Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133) Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1331.0 R 1331.1 R 1331.2 R 1331.3 R 1331.4 R 1331.5 R 1331.6 R 1331.7
SI31_0 SI31_1 SI31_2 SI31_3 SI31_4 SI31_5 SI31_6 SI31_7
Clamp request (5th axis) Unclamp request (5th axis) Clamped (5th axis) Clamp request (4th axis) Unclamp request (4th axis) Clamped (4th axis)
12.12 12.12 12.12 12.12 12.12 12.12
R 1332.0 R 1332.1 R 1332.2 R 1332.3 R 1332.4 R 1332.5 R 1332.6 R 1332.7
SI32_0 SI32_1 SI32_2 SI32_3 SI32_4 SI32_5 SI32_6 SI32_7
Selected tool group No. 2^0 Selected tool group No. 2^1 Selected tool group No. 2^2 Selected tool group No. 2^3 Selected tool group No. 2^4 Selected tool group No. 2^5 Selected tool group No. 2^6 Selected tool group No. 2^7
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1333.0 R 1333.1 R 1333.2 R 1333.3 R 1333.4 R 1333.5 R 1333.6 R 1333.7
SI33_0 SI33_1 SI33_2 SI33_3 SI33_4 SI33_5 SI33_6 SI33_7
Tool life of group 1 Tool life of group 2 Tool life of group 3 Tool life of group 4 Tool life of group 5 Tool life of group 6 Tool life of group 7 Tool life of group 8
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1334.0 R 1334.1 R 1334.2 R 1334.3 R 1334.4 R 1334.5 R 1334.6 R 1334.7
SI34_0 SI34_1 SI34_2 SI34_3 SI34_4 SI34_5 SI34_6 SI34_7
Tool life of group 9 Tool life of group 10 Tool life of group 11 Tool life of group 12 Tool life of group 13 Tool life of group 14 Tool life of group 15 Tool life of group 16
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 90 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1335.0 R 1335.1 R 1335.2 R 1335.3 R 1335.4 R 1335.5 R 1335.6 R 1335.7
SI35_0 SI35_1 SI35_2 SI35_3 SI35_4 SI35_5 SI35_6 SI35_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 1 Advance notice of tool life of group 2 Advance notice of tool life of group 3 Advance notice of tool life of group 4 Advance notice of tool life of group 5 Advance notice of tool life of group 6 Advance notice of tool life of group 7 Advance notice of tool life of group 8
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1336.0 R 1336.1 R 1336.2 R 1336.3 R 1336.4 R 1336.5 R 1336.6 R 1336.7
SI36_0 SI36_1 SI36_2 SI36_3 SI36_4 SI36_5 SI36_6 SI36_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 9 Advance notice of tool life of group 10 Advance notice of tool life of group 11 Advance notice of tool life of group 12 Advance notice of tool life of group 13 Advance notice of tool life of group 14 Advance notice of tool life of group 15 Advance notice of tool life of group 16
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1337.0 R 1337.1 R 1337.2 R 1337.3 R 1337.4 R 1337.5 R 1337.6 R 1337.7
SI37_0 SI37_1 SI37_2 SI37_3 SI37_4 SI37_5 SI37_6 SI37_7
Display in Chinese (Simplified) Display in Portuguese Display in Russian (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
12.23 12.23 12.23
R 1338.0 R 1338.1 R 1338.2 R 1338.3 R 1338.4 R 1338.5 R 1338.6 R 1338.7
SI38_0 SI38_1 SI38_2 SI38_3 SI38_4 SI38_5 SI38_6 SI38_7
Tool clamp signal Tool change signal Turret recovery mode Single block Rapid traverse LOW Rapid traverse 25% Rapid traverse 50% Rapid traverse 100%
12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
R 1339.0 R 1339.1
SI39_0 SI39_1
Tap return mode Condition of reset
12.2 ON while the reset button on the operator's panel is being pressed.
R 1339.2 R 1339.3 R 1339.4 R 1339.5 R 1339.6 R 1339.7
SI39_2 SI39_3 SI39_4 SI39_5 SI39_6 SI39_7
- 91 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1400.0 R 1400.1 R 1400.2 R 1400.3 R 1400.4 R 1400.5 R 1400.6 R 1400.7
SI50_0 SI50_1 SI50_2 SI50_3 SI50_4 SI50_5 SI50_6 SI50_7
Tool life of group 17 Tool life of group 18 Tool life of group 19 Tool life of group 20 Tool life of group 21 Tool life of group 22 Tool life of group 23 Tool life of group 24
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1401.0 R 1401.1 R 1401.2 R 1401.3 R 1401.4 R 1401.5 R 1401.6 R 1401.7
SI51_0 SI51_1 SI51_2 SI51_3 SI51_4 SI51_5 SI51_6 SI51_7
Tool life of group 25 Tool life of group 26 Tool life of group 27 Tool life of group 28 Tool life of group 29 Tool life of group 30 Tool life of group 31 Tool life of group 32
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1402.0 R 1402.1 R 1402.2 R 1402.3 R 1402.4 R 1402.5 R 1402.6 R 1402.7
SI52_0 SI52_1 SI52_2 SI52_3 SI52_4 SI52_5 SI52_6 SI52_7
Tool life of group 33 Tool life of group 34 Tool life of group 35 Tool life of group 36 Tool life of group 37 Tool life of group 38 Tool life of group 39 Tool life of group 40
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1403.0 R 1403.1 R 1403.2 R 1403.3 R 1403.4 R 1403.5 R 1403.6 R 1403.7
SI53_0 SI53_1 SI53_2 SI53_3 SI53_4 SI53_5 SI53_6 SI53_7
Tool life of group 41 Tool life of group 42 Tool life of group 43 Tool life of group 44 Tool life of group 45 Tool life of group 46 Tool life of group 47 Tool life of group 48
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1404.0 R 1404.1 R 1404.2 R 1404.3 R 1404.4 R 1404.5 R 1404.6 R 1404.7
SI54_0 SI54_1 SI54_2 SI54_3 SI54_4 SI54_5 SI54_6 SI54_7
Tool life of group 49 Tool life of group 50 Tool life of group 51 Tool life of group 52 Tool life of group 53 Tool life of group 54 Tool life of group 55 Tool life of group 56
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 92 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1405.0 R 1405.1 R 1405.2 R 1405.3 R 1405.4 R 1405.5 R 1405.6 R 1405.7
SI55_0 SI55_1 SI55_2 SI55_3 SI55_4 SI55_5 SI55_6 SI55_7
Tool life of group 57 Tool life of group 58 Tool life of group 59 Tool life of group 60 Tool life of group 61 Tool life of group 62 Tool life of group 63 Tool life of group 64
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1406.0 R 1406.1 R 1406.2 R 1406.3 R 1406.4 R 1406.5 R 1406.6 R 1406.7
SI56_0 SI56_1 SI56_2 SI56_3 SI56_4 SI56_5 SI56_6 SI56_7
Tool life of group 65 Tool life of group 66 Tool life of group 67 Tool life of group 68 Tool life of group 69 Tool life of group 70 Tool life of group 71 Tool life of group 72
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1407.0 R 1407.1 R 1407.2 R 1407.3 R 1407.4 R 1407.5 R 1407.6 R 1407.7
SI57_0 SI57_1 SI57_2 SI57_3 SI57_4 SI57_5 SI57_6 SI57_7
Tool life of group 73 Tool life of group 74 Tool life of group 75 Tool life of group 76 Tool life of group 77 Tool life of group 78 Tool life of group 79 Tool life of group 80
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1408.0 R 1408.1 R 1408.2 R 1408.3 R 1408.4 R 1408.5 R 1408.6 R 1408.7
SI58_0 SI58_1 SI58_2 SI58_3 SI58_4 SI58_5 SI58_6 SI58_7
Tool life of group 81 Tool life of group 82 Tool life of group 83 Tool life of group 84 Tool life of group 85 Tool life of group 86 Tool life of group 87 Tool life of group 88
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1409.0 R 1409.1 R 1409.2 R 1409.3 R 1409.4 R 1409.5 R 1409.6 R 1409.7
SI59_0 SI59_1 SI59_2 SI59_3 SI59_4 SI59_5 SI59_6 SI59_7
Tool life of group 89 Tool life of group 90 Tool life of group 91 Tool life of group 92 Tool life of group 93 Tool life of group 94 Tool life of group 95 Tool life of group 96
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 93 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1410.0 R 1410.1 R 1410.2 R 1410.3 R 1410.4 R 1410.5 R 1410.6 R 1410.7
SI60_0 SI60_1 SI60_2 SI60_3 SI60_4 SI60_5 SI60_6 SI60_7
Tool life of group 97 Tool life of group 98 Tool life of group 99 Tool life of group 100 Tool life of group 101 Tool life of group 102 Tool life of group 103 Tool life of group 104
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1411.0 R 1411.1 R 1411.2 R 1411.3 R 1411.4 R 1411.5 R 1411.6 R 1411.7
SI61_0 SI61_1 SI61_2 SI61_3 SI61_4 SI61_5 SI61_6 SI61_7
Tool life of group 105 Tool life of group 106 Tool life of group 107 Tool life of group 108 Tool life of group 109 Tool life of group 110 Tool life of group 111 Tool life of group 112
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1412.0 R 1412.1 R 1412.2 R 1412.3 R 1412.4 R 1412.5 R 1412.6 R 1412.7
SI62_0 SI62_1 SI62_2 SI62_3 SI62_4 SI62_5 SI62_6 SI62_7
Tool life of group 113 Tool life of group 114 Tool life of group 115 Tool life of group 116 Tool life of group 117 Tool life of group 118 Tool life of group 119 Tool life of group 120
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1413.0 R 1413.1 R 1413.2 R 1413.3 R 1413.4 R 1413.5 R 1413.6 R 1413.7
SI63_0 SI63_1 SI63_2 SI63_3 SI63_4 SI63_5 SI63_6 SI63_7
Tool life of group 121 Tool life of group 122 Tool life of group 123 Tool life of group 124 Tool life of group 125 Tool life of group 126 Tool life of group 127 Tool life of group 128
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1414.0 R 1414.1 R 1414.2 R 1414.3 R 1414.4 R 1414.5 R 1414.6 R 1414.7
SI64_0 SI64_1 SI64_2 SI64_3 SI64_4 SI64_5 SI64_6 SI64_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 17 Advance notice of tool life of group 18 Advance notice of tool life of group 19 Advance notice of tool life of group 20 Advance notice of tool life of group 21 Advance notice of tool life of group 22 Advance notice of tool life of group 23 Advance notice of tool life of group 24
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 94 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1415.0 R 1415.1 R 1415.2 R 1415.3 R 1415.4 R 1415.5 R 1415.6 R 1415.7
SI65_0 SI65_1 SI65_2 SI65_3 SI65_4 SI65_5 SI65_6 SI65_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 25 Advance notice of tool life of group 26 Advance notice of tool life of group 27 Advance notice of tool life of group 28 Advance notice of tool life of group 29 Advance notice of tool life of group 30 Advance notice of tool life of group 31 Advance notice of tool life of group 32
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1416.0 R 1416.1 R 1416.2 R 1416.3 R 1416.4 R 1416.5 R 1416.6 R 1416.7
SI66_0 SI66_1 SI66_2 SI66_3 SI66_4 SI66_5 SI66_6 SI66_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 33 Advance notice of tool life of group 34 Advance notice of tool life of group 35 Advance notice of tool life of group 36 Advance notice of tool life of group 37 Advance notice of tool life of group 38 Advance notice of tool life of group 39 Advance notice of tool life of group 40
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1417.0 R 1417.1 R 1417.2 R 1417.3 R 1417.4 R 1417.5 R 1417.6 R 1417.7
SI67_0 SI67_1 SI67_2 SI67_3 SI67_4 SI67_5 SI67_6 SI67_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 41 Advance notice of tool life of group 42 Advance notice of tool life of group 43 Advance notice of tool life of group 44 Advance notice of tool life of group 45 Advance notice of tool life of group 46 Advance notice of tool life of group 47 Advance notice of tool life of group 48
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1418.0 R 1418.1 R 1418.2 R 1418.3 R 1418.4 R 1418.5 R 1418.6 R 1418.7
SI68_0 SI68_1 SI68_2 SI68_3 SI68_4 SI68_5 SI68_6 SI68_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 49 Advance notice of tool life of group 50 Advance notice of tool life of group 51 Advance notice of tool life of group 52 Advance notice of tool life of group 53 Advance notice of tool life of group 54 Advance notice of tool life of group 55 Advance notice of tool life of group 56
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1419.0 R 1419.1 R 1419.2 R 1419.3 R 1419.4 R 1419.5 R 1419.6 R 1419.7
SI69_0 SI69_1 SI69_2 SI69_3 SI69_4 SI69_5 SI69_6 SI69_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 57 Advance notice of tool life of group 58 Advance notice of tool life of group 59 Advance notice of tool life of group 60 Advance notice of tool life of group 61 Advance notice of tool life of group 62 Advance notice of tool life of group 63 Advance notice of tool life of group 64
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 95 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1420.0 R 1420.1 R 1420.2 R 1420.3 R 1420.4 R 1420.5 R 1420.6 R 1420.7
SI70_0 SI70_1 SI70_2 SI70_3 SI70_4 SI70_5 SI70_6 SI70_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 65 Advance notice of tool life of group 66 Advance notice of tool life of group 67 Advance notice of tool life of group 68 Advance notice of tool life of group 69 Advance notice of tool life of group 70 Advance notice of tool life of group 71 Advance notice of tool life of group 72
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1421.0 R 1421.1 R 1421.2 R 1421.3 R 1421.4 R 1421.5 R 1421.6 R 1421.7
SI71_0 SI71_1 SI71_2 SI71_3 SI71_4 SI71_5 SI71_6 SI71_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 73 Advance notice of tool life of group 74 Advance notice of tool life of group 75 Advance notice of tool life of group 76 Advance notice of tool life of group 77 Advance notice of tool life of group 78 Advance notice of tool life of group 79 Advance notice of tool life of group 80
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1422.0 R 1422.1 R 1422.2 R 1422.3 R 1422.4 R 1422.5 R 1422.6 R 1422.7
SI72_0 SI72_1 SI72_2 SI72_3 SI72_4 SI72_5 SI72_6 SI72_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 81 Advance notice of tool life of group 82 Advance notice of tool life of group 83 Advance notice of tool life of group 84 Advance notice of tool life of group 85 Advance notice of tool life of group 86 Advance notice of tool life of group 87 Advance notice of tool life of group 88
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1423.0 R 1423.1 R 1423.2 R 1423.3 R 1423.4 R 1423.5 R 1423.6 R 1423.7
SI73_0 SI73_1 SI73_2 SI73_3 SI73_4 SI73_5 SI73_6 SI73_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 89 Advance notice of tool life of group 90 Advance notice of tool life of group 91 Advance notice of tool life of group 92 Advance notice of tool life of group 93 Advance notice of tool life of group 94 Advance notice of tool life of group 95 Advance notice of tool life of group 96
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1424.0 R 1424.1 R 1424.2 R 1424.3 R 1424.4 R 1424.5 R 1424.6 R 1424.7
SI74_0 SI74_1 SI74_2 SI74_3 SI74_4 SI74_5 SI74_6 SI74_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 97 Advance notice of tool life of group 98 Advance notice of tool life of group 99 Advance notice of tool life of group 100 Advance notice of tool life of group 101 Advance notice of tool life of group 102 Advance notice of tool life of group 103 Advance notice of tool life of group 104
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
- 96 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Note
R 1425.0 R 1425.1 R 1425.2 R 1425.3 R 1425.4 R 1425.5 R 1425.6 R 1425.7
SI75_0 SI75_1 SI75_2 SI75_3 SI75_4 SI75_5 SI75_6 SI75_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 105 Advance notice of tool life of group 106 Advance notice of tool life of group 107 Advance notice of tool life of group 108 Advance notice of tool life of group 109 Advance notice of tool life of group 110 Advance notice of tool life of group 111 Advance notice of tool life of group 112
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1426.0 R 1426.1 R 1426.2 R 1426.3 R 1426.4 R 1426.5 R 1426.6 R 1426.7
SI76_0 SI76_1 SI76_2 SI76_3 SI76_4 SI76_5 SI76_6 SI76_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 113 Advance notice of tool life of group 114 Advance notice of tool life of group 115 Advance notice of tool life of group 116 Advance notice of tool life of group 117 Advance notice of tool life of group 118 Advance notice of tool life of group 119 Advance notice of tool life of group 120
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1427.0 R 1427.1 R 1427.2 R 1427.3 R 1427.4 R 1427.5 R 1427.6 R 1427.7
SI77_0 SI77_1 SI77_2 SI77_3 SI77_4 SI77_5 SI77_6 SI77_7
Advance notice of tool life of group 121 Advance notice of tool life of group 122 Advance notice of tool life of group 123 Advance notice of tool life of group 124 Advance notice of tool life of group 125 Advance notice of tool life of group 126 Advance notice of tool life of group 127 Advance notice of tool life of group 128
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
R 1428.0 R 1428.1 R 1428.2 R 1428.3 R 1428.4 R 1428.5 R 1428.6 R 1428.7
SI78_0 SI78_1 SI78_2 SI78_3 SI78_4 SI78_5 SI78_6 SI78_7
Robot system being started Cycle stop mode System stop mode System start (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33
R 1429.0 R 1429.1
SI79_0 SI79_1
(Reserved) Taper cleaning coolant ON signal
R 1429.2
SI79_2
Machining coolant ON signal
R 1429.3 R 1429.4 R 1429.5 R 1429.6 R 1429.7
SI79_3 SI79_4 SI79_5 SI79_6 SI79_7
Teach mode signal Front door open signal Interaction mode signal
- 97 -
When the taper cleaning coolant valve and pump are ON When the machining coolant valve and pump are ON 12.33 12.33 12.33
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Function
Symbol
R 1430.0 R 1430.1 R 1430.2 R 1430.3
SI80_0 SI80_1 SI80_2 SI80_3
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) Probe signal error
R 1430.4 R 1430.5 R 1430.6 R 1430.7
SI80_4 SI80_5 SI80_6 SI80_7
(Reserved)
R 1431.0
SI81_0
R 1431.1
SI81_1
R 1431.2
SI81_2
R 1431.3
SI81_3
R 1431.4 R 1431.5
SI81_4 SI81_5
R 1431.6 R 1431.7
SI81_6 SI81_7
When menu operation "1. TOOL CHANGE" is selected When menu operation "2. AXES MOVEMENT" is selected When menu operation "3. SPINDLE REV." is selected When menu operation "4. REF. POINT" is selected When menu operation "5. CANCEL" is selected When menu operation "6. EXT. SIGNAL" is selected When menu operation "7. CLAMP" is selected When menu operation "8. NC LANGUAGE" is selected
R 1432.0
SI82_0
R 1432.1
SI82_1
R 1432.2
SI82_2
R 1432.3
SI82_3
R 1432.4
SI82_4
R 1432.5
SI82_5
R 1432.6
SI82_6
R 1432.7
SI82_7
B-85314EN-1/01
Note
ON when a touch probe failure is detected between M38 and M39.
Error signal at tool registration/runout measurement Excessive tool runout signal
- 98 -
ON when a failure is detected (tool runout detection function). ON when there is excessive tool runout (tool runout detection function).
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
[CNC → Custom ladder] Function
Symbol
Note
F 0010.0 F 0010.1 F 0010.2 F 0010.3 F 0010.4 F 0010.5 F 0010.6 F 0010.7
M code 2^0 M code 2^1 M code 2^2 M code 2^3 M code 2^4 M code 2^5 M code 2^6 M code 2^7
12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27
F 0011.0 F 0011.1 F 0011.2 F 0011.3 F 0011.4 F 0011.5 F 0011.6 F 0011.7
M code 2^8 M code 2^9 M code 2^10 M code 2^11 M code 2^12 M code 2^13 M code 2^14 M code 2^15
12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27
F 0012.0 F 0012.1 F 0012.2 F 0012.3 F 0012.4 F 0012.5 F 0012.6 F 0012.7
M code 2^16 M code 2^17 M code 2^18 M code 2^19 M code 2^20 M code 2^21 M code 2^22 M code 2^23
12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27
F 0013.0 F 0013.1 F 0013.2 F 0013.3 F 0013.4 F 0013.5 F 0013.6 F 0013.7
M code 2^24 M code 2^25 M code 2^26 M code 2^27 M code 2^28 M code 2^29 M code 2^30 M code 2^31
12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27 12.27
- 99 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
Symbol
B-85314EN-1/01
[Custom ladder → System ladder] Function Workpiece No./program No. search 2^0*1 Workpiece No./program No. search 2^1*1 Workpiece No./program No. search 2^2*1 Workpiece No./program No. search 2^3*1 /Program No. search 2^0*10 /Program No. search 2^1*10 /Program No. search 2^2*10 /Program No. search 2^3*10
Note
R 1350.0 R 1350.1 R 1350.2 R 1350.3 R 1350.4 R 1350.5 R 1350.6 R 1350.7
SO0_0 SO0_1 SO0_2 SO0_3 SO0_4 SO0_5 SO0_6 SO0_7
R 1351.0 R 1351.1 R 1351.2 R 1351.3 R 1351.4 R 1351.5 R 1351.6 R 1351.7
SO1_0 SO1_1 SO1_2 SO1_3 SO1_4 SO1_5 SO1_6 SO1_7
R 1352.0 R 1352.1 R 1352.2 R 1352.3 R 1352.4 R 1352.5 R 1352.6 R 1352.7
SO2_0 SO2_1 SO2_2 SO2_3 SO2_4 SO2_5 SO2_6 SO2_7
Data read request External start External hold External reset External emergency stop Completion (FIN) Single block mode ON Dry run mode ON
12.5 12.28 12.28 12.28 12.28 12.6 12.28 12.28
R 1353.0 R 1353.1 R 1353.2 R 1353.3 R 1353.4 R 1353.5 R 1353.6 R 1353.7
SO3_0 SO3_1 SO3_2 SO3_3 SO3_4 SO3_5 SO3_6 SO3_7
Door close request External door open control External door close control DNC operation Custom macro interrupt Reset & rewind Automatic side door open request Automatic side door close request
12.3 12.3 12.3 12.28 12.8 12.9 12.20 12.20
R 1354.0
SO4_0
12.13
R 1354.1 R 1354.2 R 1354.3 R 1354.4 R 1354.5 R 1354.6 R 1354.7
SO4_1 SO4_2 SO4_3 SO4_4 SO4_5 SO4_6 SO4_7
Disabling of machine operator's panel start button X-axis interlock Y-axis interlock Z-axis interlock 4-th axis interlock 5-th axis interlock Door interlock (Reserved)
/Program No. search 2^0*100 /Program No. search 2^1*100 /Program No. search 2^2*100 /Program No. search 2^3*100 /Program No. search 2^0*1000 /Program No. search 2^1*1000 /Program No. search 2^2*1000 /Program No. search 2^3*1000
- 100 -
12.4/12.5 12.4/12.5 12.4/12.5 12.4/12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.25 12.20
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
[Custom ladder → System ladder] Function
Symbol
Note
R 1355.0 R 1355.1 R 1355.2 R 1355.3 R 1355.4 R 1355.5 R 1355.6 R 1355.7
SO5_0 SO5_1 SO5_2 SO5_3 SO5_4 SO5_5 SO5_6 SO5_7
Alarm message display in progress Operator message display in progress Machine status output 1 request Machine status output 2 request Machine status output 3 request Disabling of ROBODRILL operator's panel Operator message display in progress 2 Lamp check function ON
R 1356.0 R 1356.1 R 1356.2 R 1356.3 R 1356.4 R 1356.5 R 1356.6 R 1356.7
SO6_0 SO6_1 SO6_2 SO6_3 SO6_4 SO6_5 SO6_6 SO6_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R 1357.0 R 1357.1 R 1357.2 R 1357.3 R 1357.4 R 1357.5 R 1357.6 R 1357.7
SO7_0 SO7_1 SO7_2 SO7_3 SO7_4 SO7_5 SO7_6 SO7_7
Tool breakage Block skip ON (/, /1) Switching of operation mode (to MEM mode) Switching of operation mode (to MDI mode) Switching of operation mode (to handle mode) Switching of operation mode (to edit mode) Machine interior lamp ON Machine interior cleaning coolant control
12.11 12.35 12.14 12.14 12.14 12.14 12.30 12.17
R 1358.0 R 1358.1 R 1358.2 R 1358.3 R 1358.4 R 1358.5 R 1358.6 R 1358.7
SO8_0 SO8_1 SO8_2 SO8_3 SO8_4 SO8_5 SO8_6 SO8_7
4-axis clamp (M10) signal output command 4-axis unclamp (M11) signal output command 5-axis clamp (M68) signal output command 5-axis unclamp (M69) signal output command Counter 1 (production count) reset Counter 1 (total production count) reset Counter 2 (production count) reset Counter 2 (total production count) reset
12.12 12.12 12.12 12.12 12.15 12.15 12.15 12.15
R 1359.0 R 1359.1 R 1359.2 R 1359.3 R 1359.4 R 1359.5 R 1359.6 R 1359.7
SO9_0 SO9_1 SO9_2 SO9_3 SO9_4 SO9_5 SO9_6 SO9_7
Counter screen display
12.15
Alarm output 2 stoppage Door unlock Tool group reset request Power OFF request No spindle rotating Low air pressure message cancel
12.10 12.19 12.11 12.31 12.22 The message is not displayed when this signal is ON.
- 101 -
12.29 12.29 12.16 12.16 12.16 12.13 12.29 12.13
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS Address
B-85314EN-1/01
[Custom ladder→ System ladder] Function
Symbol
Note
R 1360.0 R 1360.1 R 1360.2 R 1360.3 R 1360.4 R 1360.5 R 1360.6 R 1360.7
SO10_0 SO10_1 SO10_2 SO10_3 SO10_4 SO10_5 SO10_6 SO10_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R 1361.0 R 1361.1 R 1361.2 R 1361.3 R 1361.4 R 1361.5 R 1361.6 R 1361.7
SO11_0 SO11_1 SO11_2 SO11_3 SO11_4 SO11_5 SO11_6 SO11_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R 1362.0 R 1362.1 R 1362.2 R 1362.3 R 1362.4 R 1362.5 R 1362.6 R 1362.7
SO12_0 SO12_1 SO12_2 SO12_3 SO12_4 SO12_5 SO12_6 SO12_7
Output signal for custom macro (#1000) Output signal for custom macro (#1001) Output signal for custom macro (#1002) Output signal for custom macro (#1003) Output signal for custom macro (#1004) Output signal for custom macro (#1005) Output signal for custom macro (#1006) Output signal for custom macro (#1007)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1363.0 R 1363.1 R 1363.2 R 1363.3 R 1363.4 R 1363.5 R 1363.6 R 1363.7
SO13_0 SO13_1 SO13_2 SO13_3 SO13_4 SO13_5 SO13_6 SO13_7
Output signal for custom macro (#1008) Output signal for custom macro (#1009) Output signal for custom macro (#1010) Output signal for custom macro (#1011) Output signal for custom macro (#1012) Output signal for custom macro (#1013) Output signal for custom macro (#1014) Output signal for custom macro (#1015)
12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26 12.26
R 1364.0 R 1364.1 R 1364.2 R 1364.3 R 1364.4 R 1364.5 R 1364.6 R 1364.7
SO14_0 SO14_1 SO14_2 SO14_3 SO14_4 SO14_5 SO14_6 SO14_7
Tool group No. specification 2^0 Tool group No. specification 2^1 Tool group No. specification 2^2 Tool group No. specification 2^3 Tool group No. specification 2^4 Tool group No. specification 2^5 Tool group No. specification 2^6 Tool group No. specification 2^7
12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11 12.11
Clamp check (4th axis) Unclamp check (4th axis) Clamp check (5th axis) Unclamp check (5th axis)
- 102 -
12.12 12.12 12.12 12.12
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address
Symbol
[Custom ladder→ System ladder] Function
Note
R 1365.0 R 1365.1 R 1365.2 R 1365.3 R 1365.4 R 1365.5 R 1365.6 R 1365.7
SO15_0 SO15_1 SO15_2 SO15_3 SO15_4 SO15_5 SO15_6 SO15_7
Spindle override 2^0 Spindle override 2^1 Spindle override 2^2 Spindle override 2^3 Spindle override 2^4 Spindle override 2^5 Spindle override 2^6 Spindle override 2^7
12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32
R 1366.0 R 1366.1 R 1366.2 R 1366.3 R 1366.4 R 1366.5 R 1366.6 R 1366.7
SO16_0 SO16_1 SO16_2 SO16_3 SO16_4 SO16_5 SO16_6 SO16_7
Cutting override 2^0 Cutting override 2^1 Cutting override 2^2 Cutting override 2^3 Cutting override 2^4 Cutting override 2^5 Cutting override 2^6 Cutting override 2^7
12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32 12.32
R 1367.0 R 1367.1 R 1367.2 R 1367.3 R 1367.4 R 1367.5 R 1367.6 R 1367.7
SO17_0 SO17_1 SO17_2 SO17_3 SO17_4 SO17_5 SO17_6 SO17_7
Robot teach in progress Interaction/independent operation switch System start Robot operation screen display Cycle stop command System stop command Robot reset Peripheral device ready
12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33 12.33
R 1368.0 R 1368.1 R 1368.2
SO18_0 SO18_1 SO18_2
R 1368.3
SO18_3
R 1368.4 R 1368.5
SO18_4 SO18_5
R 1368.6 R 1368.7
SO18_6 SO18_7
Automatic side door open Automatic side door closed Detection of the center through coolant lower limit Detection of an abnormal center through coolant pressure (upper limit) Detection of clogging of the center through filter Detection of an abnormal center through coolant pressure (lower limit) Overheating of the center through coolant pump Detection of clogging of the center through suction filter
12.33 12.33 OFF when the lower limit is detected. OFF when an abnormal pressure is detected. OFF when clogging is detected. OFF when an abnormal pressure is detected. ON when overheating is detected. OFF when clogging is detected.
R 1369.0 R 1369.1 R 1369.2 R 1369.3 R 1369.4 R 1369.5 R 1369.6 R 1369.7
SO19_0 SO19_1 SO19_2 SO19_3 SO19_4 SO19_5 SO19_6 SO19_7
Center through coolant pump on/off command Center through coolant on/off command Air purge on/off command Spindle air blow (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) Start of the lubrication pump
12.17 12.17 12.17 Air of the spindle blows for ON.
- 103 -
Pump is executing for ON.
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
[Custom ladder→ System ladder] Function
Address
Symbol
R 1370.0 R 1370.1 R 1370.2 R 1370.3 R 1370.4
SO20_0 SO20_1 SO20_2 SO20_3 SO20_4
(Reserved) (Reserved) System being started (Reserved) Automatic power-off disable signal
R 1370.5
SO20_5
Rapid traverse LOW selection
R 1370.6
SO20_6
Rapid traverse 100% selection
R 1370.7
SO20_7
R 1371.0 R 1371.1 R 1371.2 R 1371.3 R 1371.4 R 1371.5 R 1371.6 R 1371.7
SO21_0 SO21_1 SO21_2 SO21_3 SO21_4 SO21_5 SO21_6 SO21_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R1372.0 R1372.1 R1372.2 R1372.3 R1372.4 R1372.5 R1372.6 R1372.7
SO22_0 SO22_1 SO22_2 SO22_3 SO22_4 SO22_5 SO22_6 SO22_7
(Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved)
R1373.0 R1373.1 R1373.2 R1373.3 R1373.4 R1373.5 R1373.6 R1373.7
SO23_0 SO23_1 SO23_2 SO23_3 SO23_4 SO23_5 SO23_6 SO23_7
Customizing item 1 count signal Customizing item 2 count signal Customizing item 3 count signal Customizing item 4 count signal Customizing item 5 count signal Customizing item 6 count signal Customizing item 7 count signal Customizing item 8 count signal
12.34 12.34 12.34 12.34 12.34 12.34 12.34 12.34
R 1374.0 R 1374.1 R 1374.2 R 1374.3 R 1374.4 R 1374.5 R 1374.6 R 1374.7
SO24_0 SO24_1 SO24_2 SO24_3 SO24_4 SO24_5 SO24_6 SO24_7
Optional block skip (/2) Optional block skip (/3) Optional block skip (/4) Optional block skip (/5) Optional block skip (/6) Optional block skip (/7) Optional block skip (/8) Optional block skip (/9)
12.35 12.35 12.35 12.35 12.35 12.35 12.35 12.35
- 104 -
Note
12.33 ON when the automatic power-off function is disabled. ON when rapid traverse LOW is selected. Turn on this signal for approx. 100 ms. ON when rapid traverse 100% is selected. Turn on this signal for approx. 100 ms.
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.1
BASIC SIGNALS Address
Always ON Always OFF ON in a single scanning cycle at the start of operation 1.0-second clock pulse 0.1-second clock pulse 0.5-second clock pulse
12.2
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Symbol
Function
SI0_0 (R1300.0) SI0_1 (R1300.1) SI0_2 (R1300.2)
Always ON during ladder program operation. Always OFF during ladder program operation. ON only during a single scan cycle (4 ms) when the ladder program starts.
SI0_3 (R1300.3) SI0_4 (R1300.4) SI0_5 (R1300.5)
Repeats on and off at intervals of about 1 second. Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.1 seconds. Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.5 seconds.
MACHINE STATUS Address
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Symbol
Number of the program being executed
SI2_0 (R1302.0)SI3_7 (R1303.7)
Tool number
SI4_0 (R1304.0)SI4_7 (R1304.7)
Cycle start in progress Feed hold status
SI7_3 (R1307.3) SI7_4 (R1307.4)
Alarm state Reset in progress
SI7_5 (R1307.5) SI7_6 (R1307.6)
Emergency stop state Program stop state
SI7_7 (R1307.7) SI8_6 (R1308.6)
Battery alarm state
SI9_2 (R1309.2)
Auto mode
SI10_6 (R1310.6)
Low air pressure
SI14_5 (R1314.5)
Emergency stop button
SI14_7 (R1314.7)
Feedrate override 100%
SI15_6 (R1315.6)
Spindle speed override 100%
SI15_7 (R1315.7)
Function
The main program number currently selected on the ROBODRILL is output as binary data. Example) When O1000 is selected: Addresses: R1303 R1302 Bits: 76543210 76543210 Data: 00000011 11101000 The number (magazine number) of the tool currently mounted on the spindle is output as binary data. Example) When T14 is mounted: Address: R1304 Bits: 76543210 Data: 00001110 ON during automatic operation (including MDI operation). ON when the stop button lamp on the operator's panel is on (in the status such as feed hold stop). ON when an alarm is issued. ON in the reset status (such as when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed, M30 or M02 is specified, or the machine is in the emergency stop state). OFF in the emergency stop state. ON in the automatic operation stop state (when "STOP" is displayed for the status display on the CNC screen). ON when the voltage of the CNC memory battery is lower than or equal to the specified value. ON when the handle, jog, or manual reference position return mode is not selected. ON during memory or DNC operation when K06#7 is 1. ON when the pressure of air supplied to the ROBODRILL is lower than the specified value. OFF when the emergency stop button on the operator's panel is pressed (the hardware emergency stop circuit is turned OFF). ON when the cutting feedrate override switch is placed in the 100% position. ON when the spindle speed override is 100%.
- 105 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS [System ladder → Custom ladder] Symbol
Address Operation enabled state
SI17_6 (R1317.6)
Tool clamp signal Tool change signal Turret recovery mode Single block Rapid traverse LOW Rapid traverse 25% Rapid traverse 50% Rapid traverse 100% Tap return mode
SI38_0 (R1338.0) SI38_1 (R1338.1) SI38_2 (R1338.2) SI38_3 (R1338.3) SI38_4 (R1338.4) SI38_5 (R1338.5) SI38_6 (R1338.6) SI38_7 (R1338.7) SI39_0 (R1339.0)
12.3
B-85314EN-1/01
Function
ON when all of the following conditions are satisfied: The front door is closed. Door interlock (SO4.6) is OFF. Feed hold is not in progress. The automatic mode is set. The machine is not in the alarm or emergency stop state. Reset is not in progress. ON when the tool is clamped. ON when the tool is changed. ON when the turret is recovered. ON when single block is set to ON. ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to LOW. ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 25%. ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 50%. ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 100%. ON during tap return operation (ON while the tap return screen of the maintenance setting screen is displayed).
FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL Address
[System ladder → Custom ladder] Symbol
Function
Door open (M60) Door open (M61) Door open (M62) Door open (M63) Door open (M64) Door open (M65) Automatic door closed state
SI10_0 (R1310.0) SI17_0 (R1317.0) SI17_1 (R1317.1) SI17_2 (R1317.2) SI17_3 (R1317.3) SI17_4 (R1317.4) SI10_1 (R1310.1)
Automatic door open state
SI10_2 (R1310.2)
Automatic door open request output Automatic door close request output
SI11_1 (R1311.1)
ON when the front automatic door is in the closed limit position (the close limit proximity switch is ON and the open limit proximity switch is OFF). ON when the front automatic door is in the open limit position (the open limit proximity switch is ON and the close limit proximity switch is OFF). ON when automatic door open is specified.
SI11_2 (R1311.2)
ON when automatic door close is specified.
Address
Specifying each M code causes the front automatic door to open. Each signal is turned ON when the door opens to the limit position.
[Custom ladder→ System ladder] Symbol
Door close request
SO3_0 (R1353.0)
External door open control
SO3_1 (R1353.1)
Function
When M60 to M65 is specified, turning this signal ON causes the front automatic door to close and restarts operation. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command. Opens the front automatic door. The door is automatically unlocked. (Door unlock control is not needed.) Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command.
- 106 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
Address External door close control
Symbol
Function
SO3_2 (R1353.2)
Closes the front automatic door. Operation is not restarted after the door is closed. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command.
[Front automatic door control using M60 to M65] Opening and closing the automatic door with an M code Specify M60 to M65 command Open automatic door
Output "door open" signal
Is door close request signal input?
Close automatic door Restart of operation
In auto (MEM) or MDI mode, issuing a code M60 to M65 causes the automatic door to open. When the door is open, inputting the appropriate signal to the machine causes the door to close and operation to restart. Door open signal: SI10_0, SI17_0 to SI17_4 Door close request signal: SO3_0
CAUTION 1 The door close request signal (from a custom ladder program to a system ladder program) is effective only when an M60 to M65 command is being executed. The signal is ignored if the machine is reset or if an M60 to M65 command is not being executed. 2 When an M60 to M65 command is being executed, the operator message "2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN." is not displayed even if the door is open. 3 When the robot system standard package option is used, the M60 to M65 functions cannot be used.
- 107 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.4
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION
This function allows you to store several machining programs in program storage memory in advance, so that you can call the desired program later by using a means such as a rotary switch. Selecting the desired program number using a means such as a rotary switch first and then pressing the cycle start button causes the specified program to be selected, starting automatic operation. Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected. To use the external workpiece number search function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT. WORK No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.
[Custom ladder→ System ladder] Symbol
Address Workpiece No. search
Function
Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary data.
SO0_0 (R1350.0) SO0_3 (R1350.3)
[Relationship between the signal states and the program numbers to be selected] Switch 4 Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1 Program number to be (SO0_3) (SO0_2) (SO0_1) (SO0_0) selected 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
- 108 -
None selected O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O0008 O0009 O0010 O0011 O0012 O0013 O0014 O0015
B-85314EN-1/01
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
CAUTION 1 This function is available only in automatic operation (MEM mode). It cannot be used in MDI operation. 2 The effective program numbers are O0001 to O0015. 3 You do not necessarily store in memory the programs corresponding to all numbers. 4 If the program corresponding to a selected number is not found in memory, alarm message DS0059, "PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND" is issued when the function is initiated. 5 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single block stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection is executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped. 6 To restart a program at an intermediate point, perform a sequence number search in automatic operation mode (MEM mode), then initiate the function. Then, no program number selection is executed, but the program restarts where it was stopped. 7 When the function is initiated with all the signals being turned OFF, no program number selection is executed, but the currently selected program is executed. To execute automatic operation with a program number other than O0001 to O0015, use the steps below: • Perform a program number search (on the screen). • Turn all the program selection switch signals to "OFF". • Press the operation start button. 8 This function cannot be used together with the external program number search function. 9 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS0059 "PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND" is issued.
- 109 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.5
B-85314EN-1/01
EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION
This function allows you to supply a single program number from an external device such as a sequencer to ROBODRILL, so that that program can be called from the memory in the ROBODRILL control unit. Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected. The program number to be selected can be specified using a 4-digit BCD code. To use the external program number search function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT. PROG. No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.
[Interface] (Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal Workpiece No. search Program number data signal
Data read request signal External start signal
Address
Function
SO0_0(R1350.0) SO0_3(R1350.3) SO0_0 (R1350.0) SO0_1 (R1350.1) SO0_2 (R1350.2) SO0_3 (R1350.3) SO0_4 (R1350.4) SO0_5 (R1350.5) SO0_6 (R1350.6) SO0_7 (R1350.7) SO1_0 (R1351.0) SO1_1 (R1351.1) SO1_2 (R1351.2) SO1_3 (R1351.3) SO1_4 (R1351.4) SO1_5 (R1351.5) SO1_6 (R1351.6) SO1_7 (R1351.7)
Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary data.
SO2_0 (R1352.0)
When this signal is output, ROBODRILL reads the program number specified with the program number data signal. After the program number is selected (while an end-of-selection signal is being output from the custom ladder program), outputting this signal causes automatic operation to start. This signal must be a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer. (Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.)
SO2_1 (R1352.1)
1 digit in BCD
A program number is specified as a BCD code. Those bits that are always 0 need not used. You can omit them according to the program numbers used.
10 digits in BCD
100 digits in BCD
1000 digits in BCD
- 110 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Signal End-of-selection signal
Address
Function
SI9_0 (R1309.0)
This signal indicates that program number data reading and program number selection are completed and the machine is now ready for an automatic operation start. When this signal is output, turn the data read request signal OFF. First confirm that this signal has been output, then start automatic operation using the external start signal. This signal is turned OFF in the following cases: • Operation start • Reset • Selection of a new program number
[Timing chart for an external program number search] Program number data signal
Number setting
Data read request signal
ON
External start signal
ON
End of selection
ROBODRILL operation
ON
Number reading
- 111 -
Selection
Automatic operation
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
CAUTION 1 This function cannot be used together with the external workpiece number search function. 2 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single block stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection is executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped. 3 If there is no program corresponding to the selected number in memory, an alarm (alarm message: DS0059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND) is issued when an attempt is made to read the program number data. 4 If the data for the program number to be selected is 0, alarm message "DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE " is issued. Before the data read request signal is turned ON, be sure to set a number. 5 You can protect programs with program numbers O8000 to O8999 with the appropriate NC parameter bit setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#0 (NE8)) Programs with program numbers O9000 to O9999 are protected with the appropriate parameter setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#4 (NE9)) 6 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS1130 "SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED" is issued. 7 This function cannot be used during an emergency stop or reset.
- 112 -
B-85314EN-1/01
12.6
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION
This function outputs a specified M code number. By performing the operation corresponding to the specified M code, an external device can be interlocked with ROBODRILL. An M code number is output as a 3-digit BCD code. To use the external M code BCD output function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/ SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "ON" for "M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD".
- 113 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
[Interface] Signal
M code number data signal
Address
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Function
SI5_0 (R1305.0) SI5_1 (R1305.1) SI5_2 (R1305.2) SI5_3 (R1305.3) SI5_4 (R1305.4) SI5_5 (R1305.5) SI5_6 (R1305.6) SI5_7 (R1305.7) SI6_4 (R1306.4) SI6_5 (R1306.5) SI6_6 (R1306.6) SI6_7 (R1306.7)
Data read request signal
SI6_0 (R1306.0)
Distribution completion signal
SI6_1 (R1306.1)
BCD output data parity check signal
SI6_2 (R1306.2)
1 digit in BCD
A specified M code is output as a BCD code. Not all data need not necessarily be read. You can omit reading according to the M codes used.
10 digits in BCD
100 digits in BCD This signal indicates that the M code number data signal is being output. Read the M code number while this signal is being output. This signal indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is specified and the movement along each axis is completed. (This signal is not usually used.) The result of a parity check is output. Parity check Even parity check K01#1 = 0 Odd parity check K01#1 = 1
Check signal 0 1 0 1
Parity of specified M code K04#5 = 0 K04#5 = 1 Odd Even Even Odd Even Odd
Odd Even
K01#1: Selection between even and odd parity checks K04#5: Selection between parity check result output states
Signal
Completion signal (FIN)
Address
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Function
S02_5 (R1352.5)
After the operation of the external device is completed, input this signal. When the signal is input, ROBODRILL ends M code output, proceeding to the next block of the program. Turn this signal OFF at the end of the M code output.
- 114 -
B-85314EN-1/01
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
[Timing chart for external M code BCD output] M code number data signal
ON
ON
Data read request signal
ON
ON
Completion signal
ROBODRILL operation
ON
M code specification
ON
M code specification
CAUTION 1 This function cannot be used together with the M code output function. 2 Never use the M codes used by FANUC.(From M00 to M199) 3 When using multiple M code commands, specify the external M code at the first M code position.
- 115 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.7
B-85314EN-1/01
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89)
This function outputs the signal corresponding to a specified M code. [System ladder → Custom ladder] Address
Symbol
Function
M81 output M82 output M83 output
SI5_2 (R1305.2) SI5_3 (R1305.3) SI5_4 (R1305.4)
M84 output M80 output M85 output M86 output M87 output M88 output M89 output
SI5_5 (R1305.5) SI5_1 (R1305.1) SI5_6 (R1305.6) SI5_7 (R1305.7) SI6_0 (R1306.0) SI6_1 (R1306.1) SI6_2 (R1306.2)
A 100-ms pulse signal is output. (Pulse type) ON when M83 is specified or OFF when M84 is specified. (ON1 type) ON when the corresponding M code is specified. (FIN type) OFF when the completion (FIN) signal (SO2_5) is turned ON.
(ON1 type)
(Pulse type) M code specification
Signal output
M code specification
M81
Signal output
ON
M83
M84
ON
(FIN type) M code specification
Signal output
External device
M81
ON
Operation
Completion signal
If an M code of the pulse or ON1 type is specified, the machine automatically proceeds to the next block of the program after the output (or stoppage) of the signal. If an M code of the FIN type is specified, the machine waits for the input of an external completion signal, then proceeds to the next block of the program after the input of the signal.
CAUTION Usually, M84 (SI5_5) is not output. It is output if all M codes M80 to M89 are set to the FIN type. (Display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set FIN TYPE.) In this case, M81 to M83 are also set to the FIN type.
- 116 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.8
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION)
During the execution of a program, this signal can be turned ON to call another program. For details of the interrupt type custom macro function, refer to the CNC operator's manual.
Address
Custom macro interrupt
12.9
SO3_4 (R1353.4)
Function
Starts an interrupt type custom macro.
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION Address
Reset & rewind
12.10
[Custom ladder → System ladder] Symbol
[Custom ladder → System ladder] Symbol
SO3_5 (R1353.5)
Function
When this signal is ON, the ROBODRILL performs the following operations: • Decelerates and stops the machine along the controlled axis along which it is moving. • Enters the reset state. Cancels the alarms that can be released. • Rewinds the currently selected main program to its top (not in the MDI mode).
ALARM OUTPUT 2
This signal is mainly used to control the buzzer when an alarm is issued. [System ladder → Custom ladder] Address
Alarm output 2
Symbol
Function
SI17_5(R1317.5)
ON when an alarm is issued. OFF when an alarm is released. OFF when the alarm output 2 stop signal (SO9_2) is turned ON. OFF when K06#2 is 1 and the time specified for timer T06 has elapsed.
[Custom ladder → System ladder] Address
Alarm output 2 stop
Symbol
Function
SO9_2 (R1359.2)
When alarm output 2 (SI17_5) is ON, turning this signal ON turns alarm output 2 (SI17_5) OFF. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command.
- 117 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.11
B-85314EN-1/01
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
(1) Reset of a tool group (counter) A specified tool group (counter) can be reset. (Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
Signal
Tool group (counter) number Tool group (counter) reset request
SO14_0 (R1364.0) ⏐ SO14_7 (R1364.7) SO9_4 (R1359.4)
The number of the tool group (counter) to be reset is specified as binary data. (0 to 14) If 0 is specified, the currently selected tool group is assumed. When this signal is output, ROBODRILL resets the tool group (counter). Turn this signal ON after specifying a tool group (counter) number. Keep it ON until the reset request reception signal (SI18_5) is turned ON. Turn it OFF as soon as the reset request reception signal is turned ON.
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address
Signal
Tool group (counter) reset request reception
SI18_5 (R1318.5)
Tool group (counter) reset error
SI18_6 (R1318.6)
Function
Function
This signal indicates that ROBODRILL has accepted a tool group (counter) reset request. Turn the reset request signal (SO9.4) OFF after this signal is turned ON. This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal (SO9_4) is turned OFF. This signal indicates that an error occurred during an attempt to reset a tool group (counter). This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal (SO9_4) is turned OFF.
SUPPLEMENT To specify 0 as the tool group (counter) number (to specify the currently selected tool group), specify tool group selection (M06 T1xx) after power-on, then issue a reset request. If a reset request is issued without specifying tool group selection, an error (SI18_6 = ON) occurs. Tool group number
Group number specification
Tool group reset request
ON
Tool group reset request reception
ON
Tool group reset error
ON
- 118 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) Information about the life of each tool group (counter) and the currently selected tool group (counter) number Information about the life of each tool group (counter) can be indicated. The group (counter) number of the tool currently used can be indicated. Signal
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address
Currently selected tool group (counter) number
SI32_0 (R1332.0) ⏐ SI32_7 (R1332.7)
Tool life end
SI33_0 (R1333.0) ⏐ SI34_7 (R1334.7) SI50_0 (R1400.0) ⏐ SI63_7 (R1413.7) SI35_0 (R1335.0) ⏐ SI36_7 (R1336.7) SI64_0 (R1414.0) ⏐ SI77_7 (R1427.7)
Near tool life end
Function
The currently selected tool group (counter) number is indicated as binary data. 0 is indicated if tool group selection (M06 T1**) has not been specified since power-on. Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the life end state.
Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the near life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the near life end state. 1 can also indicate the life end state.
(3) Others (System ladder → Custom ladder) Signal
Address
Function
Tool life end (tool group) Near tool life end
SI10_7 (R1310.7)
ON when at least one of the registered tool groups (counters) is in the life end state. ON when the use count (or time) for the currently used tool group (counter) reaches the value set for advance notice of tool life end.
SI11_6 (R1311.6)
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Tool breakage
Address
Function
SO7_0 (R1357.0)
When the tool life management function is used and this signal is ON, the currently used tool is assumed to reach its tool life end. If a spare tool is registered to the tool group, the new tool is used at the next tool replacement. If no spare tool is registered, an alarm is issued at the end of machining. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command.
- 119 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.12
B-85314EN-1/01
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL
(1) I/O signals for additional axis clamp control can be assigned with custom PMC. Address
Function
Clamp check (4th axis) Unclamp check (4th axis) Clamp check (5th axis) Unclamp check (5th axis) Clamp request (5th axis) Unclamp request (5th axis) Clamped (5th axis)
Signal
SO10_4 (R1360.4) SO10_5 (R1360.5) SO10_6 (R1360.6) SO10_7 (R1360.7) SI31_0 (R1331.0) SI31_1 (R1331.1) SI31_2 (R1331.2)
Clamp request (4th axis) Unclamp request (4th axis) Clamped (4th axis)
SI31_3 (R1331.3) SI31_4 (R1331.4) SI31_5 (R1331.5)
Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the system ladder program. Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the system ladder program. Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the system ladder program. Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the system ladder program. Clamp command for the additional axis (5th axis) Turned ON when the M68 command is issued. Unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis) Turned ON when the M69 command is issued. Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis) Turned ON when the M68 command is issued and OFF when the M69 command is issued. Clamp command for the additional axis (4th axis) Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued. Unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis) Turned ON when the M11 or M72 command is issued. Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis) Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued and OFF when the M11 or M72 command is issued.
(Sample ladder program)
X4.0
SO10_4
SI31_3
Y2.0
To use this function, set PMC parameter, keep relay K14#3 to 1. (2) Specifying a command to clamp or unclamp an additional axis. Signal
Address
4th-axis clamp (M10) signal output command
SO8_0 (R1358.0)
4th-axis unclamp (M11) signal output command
SO8_1 (R1358.1)
5th-axis clamp (M68) signal output command
SO8_2 (R1358.2)
5th-axis unclamp (M69) signal output command
SO8_3 (R1358.3)
Function
Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (4th axis). Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms. Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis (4th axis). Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms. Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (5th axis). Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms. Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis (5th axis). Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.
- 120 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.13
OPERATOR'S PANEL
(1) Disabling the operator's panel This function disables the ROBODRILL operator's panel. To use this function, set PMC parameter keep relay K16#0 to 1. (Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
Signal description
Disabling of ROBODRILL operator's panel
SO5_5 (R1355.5)
Function
Turning on this signal disables the ROBODRILL operator's panel.
Turning on this signal causes the ROBODRILL to behave as follows: •
•
• • • • • • • •
Some buttons and keys on the ROBODRILL operator's panel become unusable. key is also made unusable (optionally). However, button, < FEED HOLD > button, key, soft key and MDI keys (ALPHABET, FIGURE AND ETC.) remain usable. "OPERATION MODE" switches to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY) MODE." If OPERATION MODE switching is impossible (for example, for "EMERGENCY STOPPING" or "MODE SELECTION LOCKING"), however, switching to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE" does not occur. For "SPINDLE ROTATING" "IN COOLANT" "CUTTING AIR BLOW" and "CENTER THROUGH COOLANT OUTPUT" each output is stopped (optionally) "DRY RUN MODE" and "SINGLE BLOCK MODE" are canceled. The M01 stop function is canceled (optionally). The cutting override value is fixed at 100% regardless of the dial setting on the operator's panel. The spindle override value is fixed at 100%. The rapid traverse override value is fixed at 100%. If this signal is issued when the machine is running, it becomes valid after the machine stops. The diagnosis message "THE OPERATOR'S PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE." appears. [PMC parameter, keep relay] Function
Parameter
K16#0 K16#1
Operator's panel disable function 0 : Disables 1 : Enables While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button 0 : Disables 1 : Enables While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button 0 : Disables 1 : Enables While the operator's panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply 0 : Canceled 1 : Not canceled While the operator's panel is disabled, the skip key 0 : Disables 1 : Enables
K16#2 K16#3 K16#4
(2) Disabling the start button Signal
Disabling of the machine operator's panel start button
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
SO4_0 (R1354.0)
Function
When this signal is ON, the start button on the ROBODRILL operator's panel is disabled. External start (SO2_1) is available regardless of the status of this signal. During turret recovery operation and menu operation, the start button is available regardless of the status of this signal.
- 121 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
(3) Checking the lamps Signal
Lamp check function ON
12.14
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
SO5_7 (R1355.7)
Function
When this signal is ON, all LEDs and status indication lamps (machine status output 1, 2, and 3) on the ROBODRILL operator's panel are turned on.
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING Signal
MEM mode selection MDI mode selection Handle mode selection Jog mode selection Reference mode selection Edit mode selection
Signal
Switching of operation mode (to the MEM mode) Switching of operation mode (to the MDI mode) Switching of operation mode (to the handle mode) Switching of operation mode (to the edit mode)
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address
SI8_0 (R1308.0) SI8_1 (R1308.1) SI8_2 (R1308.2) SI8_3 (R1308.3) SI8_4 (R1308.4) SI8_5 (R1308.5)
(Custom ladder →System ladder) Address
SO7_2 (R1357.2)
Function
ON while the corresponding mode is selected. The status of MEM mode selection (SI8_0) is related as follows: When K14#2 is 0: Memory mode and remote mode When K14#2 is 1: Only memory mode
Function
Switches to the corresponding operation mode. Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.
SO7_3 (R1357.3) SO7_4 (R1357.4) SO7_5 (R1357.5)
- 122 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.15
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT (System ladder → Custom ladder) Address
Function
Production completion
Signal
SI8_7 (R1308.7)
Production completion 1
SI11_4 (R1311.4)
Production completion 2
SI11_5 (R1311.5)
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 or 2 on the counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or equal to the scheduled number of products. ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 on the counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or equal to the scheduled number of products. ON when the number of products indicated by counter 2 on the counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or equal to the scheduled number of products.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Counter 1 (production count) reset Counter 1 (total production count) reset Counter 2 (production count) reset Counter 2 (total production count) reset Counter screen display
Address
S08_4 (R1358.4)
Function
Resets the corresponding counter. Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.
S08_5 (R1358.5)
S08_6 (R1358.6)
S08_7 (R1358.7)
S09_0 (R1359.0)
Turning this signal ON displays the counter screen. Turning this signal OFF displays the previous screen again.
- 123 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.16
B-85314EN-1/01
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT
The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are output. Each machine status output signal can be turned ON according to a desired condition.
Signal
Machine status output 1, 2, 3 (END1, 2, 3 output)
Signal
Machine status output 1, 2, 3 request
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address Function
SI7_0 (R1307.0) SI7_2(R1307.2)
The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are output. These signals are set to the ON type even if blinking is selected as a screen setting. Select the status of each signal on MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from the QUICK screen. [Signal status] ALARM: ON when an alarm is issued. OPERATOR MESSAGE: ON when an operator message is displayed. PROGRAM EXECUTING: ON during the execution of a program. PROGRAM END: ON after the end of program operation (execution of M00, M01, M02, or M30). PRODUCT COMPLETED: ON at the completion of production (production management function on the QUICK screen). FEED HOLD: ON when the stop button lamp on the operator's panel is ON. NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE: ON when the remaining use count for the last tool in the tool group is smaller than or equal to the count for advance notice.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address Function
SO5_2 (R1355.2) SO5_4 (R1355.4)
The relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are turned ON. When a signal is ON, the corresponding relay contact is ON. Since the ON/OFF status of these relay contacts is also controlled by the system ladder program, the relay contact may remain ON even when the corresponding signal is OFF. To control these relay contacts only by the custom ladder program, set all MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT items to OFF. MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT is displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from the QUICK screen.
- 124 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.17
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW (System ladder → Custom ladder) Address
Signal
Machine interior cleaning coolant output ON Coolant output ON Air blow ON Center through coolant output ON Center through coolant pump ON Center through coolant ON Air purge ON
SI9_4 (R1309.4) SI11_0 (R1311.0) SI11_3 (R1311.3) SI11_7 (R1311.7) SI24_3 (R1324.3)
ON when center through coolant pump ON is specified.
SI24_4 (R1324.4) SI24_5 (R1324.5)
ON when center through coolant ON is specified. ON when air purge ON is specified.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
Signal
Machine interior cleaning coolant ON/OFF
SO7_7 (R1357.7)
Center through coolant pump ON/OFF Center through coolant ON/OFF Center through Air purge ON/OFF
SO19_0 (R1369.0)
12.18
Function
ON when machine interior cleaning coolant pump ON is specified. ON when coolant ON is specified. ON when air blow ON is specified. ON when center through coolant ON is specified.
SO19_1 (R1369.1) SO19_2 (R1369.2)
Function
Controls the machine interior cleaning coolant. Turning this signal OFF stops the machine interior cleaning coolant output. Since the ON/OFF status of the machine interior cleaning coolant is also controlled by the system ladder program, the machine interior coolant may not be output by turning this signal ON. This signal is not effective when "MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT" is set to OFF on the standard selection screen displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING on the QUICK screen. This signal is enabled when K14#4 is 1. The corresponding device is turned ON or OFF. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command. When the command is specified, the status of each device is changed as follows: When it is OFF: ON When it is ON: OFF
COMPLETION OF MACHINING (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Address
End of program
SI9_3 (R1309.3)
Completion of machining
SI15_5 (R1315.5)
Function
ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified. (M01 is valid only when the temporary stop key on the operator's panel is ON.) ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified. OFF when the next operation starts, the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed, the emergency stop button is pressed, or the manual mode is selected.
- 125 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.19
B-85314EN-1/01
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Splash guard door closed state
Address
Function
SI9_5 (R1309.5)
ON when the front door is locked.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Door unlock
12.20
Address
Function
SO9_3 (R1359.3)
When the front door is locked, turning this signal ON unlocks the door. When the front door is unlocked and is not open, turning this signal ON locks the door. When the front door is open, this signal is not effective. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command.
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Address
Automatic side door closed state Automatic side door open state
SI9_6 (R1309.6)
Function
SI9_7 (R1309.7)
ON when the automatic side door is in the closed limit position (the proximity switch is ON). ON when the automatic side door is in the open limit position (the proximity switch is ON).
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Address
Automatic side door open request Automatic side door close request Door interlock
SO3_6 (R1353.6) SO3_7 (R1353.7) SO4_6 (R1354.6)
Function
While this signal is ON, the air valve for opening the automatic side door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.) While this signal is ON, the air valve for closing the automatic side door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.) Turning this signal ON stops program operation, spindle rotation, coolant output, and other operations in the same way as when the front door is opened.
- 126 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.21
AI TOOL MONITOR (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Address
Function
Warning level detection
SI10_3 (R1310.3)
Breakage level detection
SI10_4 (R1310.4)
12.22
ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle during machining exceeds the warning level. OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed. OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1) When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D12 is compared with the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used. ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle during machining exceeds the breakage level. OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed. OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1) When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D14 is compared with the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.
SPINDLE (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Address
Function
Spindle stop
SI10_5 (R1310.5)
S command
SI20_0 (R1320.0) SI23_7 (R1323.7)
M03 command M05 command Spindle rotation button ON
SI24_0 (R1324.0) SI24_1 (R1324.1) SI24_2 (R1324.2)
ON when the spindle stops (forward or reverse spindle rotation is not specified). The specified S code is output as binary data. Example) When S8000 is specified Addresses: R1323 R1322 R1321 R1320 Bits: 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 Data: 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000 ON when the M03 command is specified. ON when the M05 command is specified. On when the spindle rotation/stop button on the operator's panel is pressed.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
No spindle rotating
Address
SO9_6 (R1359.6)
Function
Spindle rotation is disabled while this signal is ON. When the spindle is rotating, turning this signal ON stops the rotation of the spindle. When this signal is ON, specifying spindle rotation causes an alarm.
- 127 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.23
SCREEN DISPLAY
Signal
Display in Japanese Display in German Display in French Display in Italian Display in Korean Display in Spanish Display in English Display in Chinese (Simplified) Display in Portuguese Display in Russian
12.24
B-85314EN-1/01
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address Function
ON when the corresponding display language is set.
SI12_0 (R1312.0) SI12_1 (R1312.1) SI12_2 (R1312.2) SI12_4 (R1312.4) SI12_5 (R1312.5) SI12_6 (R1312.6) SI12_7 (R1312.7) SI37_0 (R1337.0) SI37_1 (R1337.1) SI37_2 (R1337.2)
POSITION SWITCH
When the tool is positioned within the operation range specified for NC parameters along a servo axis, the corresponding signal is turned ON. (Example 1) To turn position switch 1 ON within a range between 100.000 and 200.000 along the X-axis: No. 6910 = 1, No. 6930 = 200.000, No. 6950 = 100.000
(Example 2) To turn position switch 2 ON within a range between -100.000 and -200.000 along the Y-axis: No. 6911 = 2, No. 6931 = -100.000, No. 6951 = -200.000 (System ladder → Custom ladder) Signal
Address
Position switch 1
SI13_0 (R1313.0)
Position switch 2
SI13_1 (R1313.1)
Position switch 3
SI13_2 (R1313.2)
Position switch 4
SI13_3 (R1313.3)
Position switch 5
SI13_4 (R1313.4)
Position switch 6
SI13_5 (R1313.5)
Position switch 7
SI13_6 (R1313.6)
Position switch 8
SI13_7 (R1313.7)
Function
Axis specification: No. 6910 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6930 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6950 Axis specification: No. 6911 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6931 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6951 Axis specification: No. 6912 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6932 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6952 Axis specification: No. 6913 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6933 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6953 Axis specification: No. 6914 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6934 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6954 Axis specification: No. 6915 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6935 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6955 Axis specification: No. 6916 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6936 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6956 Axis specification: No. 6917 Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6937 Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6957
- 128 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.25
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS
Signal
Movement along the Xaxis Movement along the Yaxis Movement along the Zaxis Movement along the 4th axis Movement along the 5th axis Completion of X-axis reference position return Completion of Y-axis reference position return Completion of Z-axis reference position return Completion of 4th-axis reference position return Completion of 5h-axis reference position return Establishment of Xaxis reference position Establishment of Yaxis reference position Establishment of Z-axis reference position Establishment of 4thaxis reference position Establishment of 5thaxis reference position
Signal
X-axis interlock Y-axis interlock Z-axis interlock 4th-axis interlock 5th-axis interlock
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address Function
SI14_0 (R1314.0)
ON when the tool is moving along the corresponding axis. ON when the corresponding axis is selected in handle mode.
SI14_1 (R1314.1) SI14_2 (R1314.2) SI14_3 (R1314.3) SI14_4 (R1314.4) SI15_0 (R1315.0)
SI15_1 (R1315.1)
SI15_2 (R1315.2)
SI15_3 (R1315.3)
ON at the completion of one of the following operations: • Manual reference position return • Automatic reference position return (G28) • Reference position return check (G27) OFF when the tool moves from the reference position along the corresponding axis or the machine enters the emergency stop or servo alarm state. Not turned ON when the tool moves to the machine zero point manually or according to the G00 or G01 command and when the tool is positioned at the machine zero point along the corresponding axis at the termination of tool replacement.
SI15_4 (R1315.4)
SI18_0 (R1318.0) SI18_1 (R1318.1) SI18_2 (R1318.2)
ON when the reference position is established along the corresponding axis. OFF when the reference position is lost. OFF until the reference position is determined by the absolute position detector at power-on.
SI18_3 (R1318.3) SI18_4 (R1318.4)
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address Function
SO4_1 (R1354.1) SO4_2 (R1354.2) SO4_3 (R1354.3) SO4_4 (R1354.4) SO4_5 (R1354.5)
Turning these signals OFF inhibits the movement along the corresponding axes. When a signal is turned OFF while the tool is moving, the tool decelerates and stops along the corresponding axis. When the signal is turned ON, the tool restarts moving. These signals are effective when K14#5 is 1.
- 129 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.26
B-85314EN-1/01
CUSTOM MACROS (System ladder → Custom ladder)
Signal
Input signal for custom macro (#1100), (#1132) (#1101), (#1132) (#1102), (#1132) (#1103), (#1132) (#1104), (#1132) (#1105), (#1132) (#1106), (#1132) (#1107), (#1132) (#1108), (#1132) (#1109), (#1132) (#1110), (#1132) (#1111), (#1132) (#1112), (#1132) (#1113), (#1132) (#1114), (#1132) (#1115), (#1132) Input signals for custom macro (#1133)
Address
Function
SI25_0 (R1325.0)
ON when macro statement #11**=1 (**: 00 to 15) is executed. OFF when #11**=0 is specified. When #1132=nn (nn: 2-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is output to SI25_0 to SI26_7 as binary data.
SI25_1 (R1325.1) SI25_2 (R1325.2) SI25_3 (R1325.3) SI25_4 (R1325.4) SI25_5 (R1325.5) SI25_6 (R1325.6) SI25_7 (R1325.7) SI26_0 (R1326.0) SI26_1 (R1326.1) SI26_2 (R1326.2) SI26_3 (R1326.3) SI26_4 (R1326.4) SI26_5 (R1326.5) SI26_6 (R1326.6) SI26_7 (R1326.7) SI27_0 (R1327.0) SI30_7 (R1330.7)
When #1133=nn (nn: 4-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is output to SI27_0 to SI30_7 as binary data.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Output signal for custom macro (#1000), (#1032) (#1001), (#1032) (#1002), (#1032) (#1003), (#1032) (#1004), (#1032) (#1005), (#1032) (#1006), (#1032) (#1007), (#1032) (#1008), (#1032) (#1009), (#1032) (#1010), (#1032) (#1011), (#1032) (#1012), (#1032) (#1013), (#1032) (#1014), (#1032) (#1015), (#1032)
Address
Function
SO12_0 (R1362.0)
Turning each signal ON sets the corresponding system variable #1000 to #1015 to 1. When the signal is OFF, the corresponding system variable is set to 0. Outputting binary data (2-byte data) to SO12_0 to SO13_7 sets the data in #1032. Cannot be used when a pallet changer of KAWATATEC or a tool monitor of Nodeman is attached.
SO12_1 (R1362.1) SO12_2 (R1362.2) SO12_3 (R1362.3) SO12_4 (R1362.4) SO12_5 (R1362.5) SO12_6 (R1362.6) SO12_7 (R1362.7) SO13_0 (R1363.0) SO13_1 (R1363.1) SO13_2 (R1363.2) SO13_3 (R1363.3) SO13_4 (R1363.4) SO13_5 (R1363.5) SO13_6 (R1363.6) SO13_7 (R1363.7)
- 130 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.27
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS
The number of the specified M code (first M code) is output as binary data. Use these signals together with functional instruction No. 25: binary decode processing for M code decode and other processing. (CNC → Custom ladder) Signal
M code
12.28
Address
Function
F10.0 - F13.7
The number of the specified M code is output as binary data. Example) When M200 is specified: Addresses : F13 F12 F11 F10 Bits: 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 Data: 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000
OPERATION CONTROL (Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
Function
External start
Signal
SO2_1 (R1352.1)
External hold
SO2_2 (R1352.2)
External reset
SO2_3 (R1352.3)
External emergency stop
SO2_4 (R1352.4)
Single block mode ON
SO2_6 (R1352.6)
Dry run mode ON
SO2_7 (R1352.7)
DNC operation
SO3_3 (R1353.3)
In the memory, remote, or MDI operation mode, turning this signal ON, then OFF starts operation. When the machine has a front automatic door and "OPEN DOOR WITH START BUTTON" of automatic door control is set to ON, operation starts after the front automatic door is closed. (only during memory or remote operation) Turn this signal ON for about 200 ms when specifying the relevant command. Turning this signal OFF during operation causes the tool to decelerate and stop along each servo axis. When this signal is OFF, memory operation, remote operation, MDI operation, and tool replacement cannot be started. Effective when K14#7 is 1. Turning this signal ON causes the ROBODRILL to perform the following operations: • Decelerates and stops the tool along the controlled axis along which it is moving. • Enters the reset state. Cancels the alarms that can be released. Turning this signal OFF puts the ROBODRILL into the emergency stop state. This signal provides emergency stop control at the software level. Examine emergency stop control at the hardware level as required. Effective when K14#6 is 1. Turning this signal ON puts the ROBODRILL into the single block operation mode. Effective when K08#3 is 1. At this time, the single operation button on the operator's panel is disabled. Turning this signal ON puts the machine in the dry run operation mode. Effective when K08#4 is 1. At this time, the dry operation button on the operator's panel is disabled. When the memory operation mode is selected, turning this signal ON puts the machine in the remote operation mode.
- 131 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.29
B-85314EN-1/01
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY (Custom ladder → System ladder)
Signal
Address
Function
Alarm message display in progress
SO5_0 (R1355.0)
Operator message display in progress
SO5_1 (R1355.1)
Operator message display in progress 2
SO5_6 (R1355.6)
Turn this signal ON when an alarm message is displayed on the custom PMC. When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an alarm message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking is selected for alarms) Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the custom PMC. When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking is selected for operator messages) This signal is not used when operator message display in progress 2 (SO5_6) is used. Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the custom PMC. When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine status output 1, 2, 3) are not turned ON. This signal is not used when operator message display in progress (SO5_1) is used.
12.30
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP (Custom ladder → System ladder)
Signal
Machine interior lamp ON
12.31
Address
Function
SO7_6 (R1357.6)
Turning this signal ON turns the machine interior lamp on. Turning this signal OFF turns the lamp off. Effective when K08#0 is 1. At this time, the machine interior lamp ON/OFF switch on the screen is disabled.
POWER-OFF (Custom ladder → System ladder)
Signal
Address
Function
Power OFF request
SO9_5 (R1359.5)
Turns the ROBODRILL control power OFF. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant command. When the command is specified during operation, the control power is turned OFF after the tool stops moving along axes and the spindle stops rotating.
- 132 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
12.32
OVERRIDE CONTROL
(1) Spindle override (Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Spindle override command
Address
Function
SO15_0 (R1365.0) SO15_7 (R1365.7)
The spindle override is specified as binary data. An override of 0% to 254% can be specified. When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed. When no data is set in R1365 by the custom ladder program at power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically set. Effective when K14#1 is 1. Example) To specify 100% Address: R1365 Bits: 76543210 Data: 01100100
(2) Cutting feed override (Custom ladder →System ladder) Signal
Address
Function
Cutting feed override command
SO16_0 (R1366.0) SO16_7 (R1366.7)
The cutting feed override is specified as binary data. Specify the data [255 – (override-to-be-specified)]. An override of 0% to 254% can be specified. When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed. When no data is set in R1366 by the custom ladder program at power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically set. Effective when K14#1 is 1. Example) To specify 100%, set 155. Address: R1366 Bits: 76543210 Data: 10011011
- 133 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.33
B-85314EN-1/01
ROBOT INTERFACE
(1) When only the automatic side door is controlled
Signal
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address Function
Automatic side door closed state Automatic side door open state System start
SI78_3 (R1428.3)
Teach mode Front door open Interaction mode
SI79_3 (R1429.3) SI79_4 (R1429.4) SI79_5 (R1429.5)
Signal
SI9_6 (R1309.6) SI9_7 (R1309.7)
ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the closed limit position (the proximity switch for the closed limit position is ON). ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the open limit position (the proximity switch for the open limit position is ON). ON while the system start button is pressed (robot interface X17.4 = 1). ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0). ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0). ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or SO17_1 = 1).
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address Function
Teach mode
SO17_0 (R1367.0)
Interaction/independe nt operation switch
SO17_1 (R1367.1)
Automatic side door open
SO18_0 (R1368.0)
Automatic side door closed
SO18_1 (R1368.1)
System being started lamp
SO20_2 (R1370.2)
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that robot teach operation is in progress (valid when K19#0 = 1). When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL is placed in the interaction mode. (When using this signal, do not use the X17.2 signal of the robot interface.) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate) is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate) is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. When this signal is set to ON, the "system being started" lamp is turned on. (Robot interface Y7.1 is set to ON.)
(2) When the automatic side door and robot system are controlled
Signal
(System ladder → Custom ladder) Address Function
Robot system being started Cycle stop mode
SI78_0 (R1428.0)
ON when system operation is being started.
SI78_1 (R1428.1)
System stop mode
SI78_2 (R1428.2)
Teach mode Front door open Interaction mode
SI79_3 (R1429.3) SI79_4 (R1429.4) SI79_5 (R1429.5)
ON when the cycle stop mode is set with the soft key [CYCLE STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the cycle stop command output from the custom PMC. OFF when the cycle stop mode is terminated or canceled. ON when the system stop mode is set with the soft key [SYSTEM STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the system stop command output from the custom PMC. OFF when the system stop mode is terminated or canceled. ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0). ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0). ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or SO17_1 = 1).
- 134 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
B-85314EN-1/01
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Address
Function
Teach mode
Signal
SO17_0 (R1367.0)
Interaction/independ ent operation switch
SO17_1 (R1367.1)
Robot system start
SO17_2 (R1367.2)
Robot operation screen display
SO17_3 (R1367.3)
This signal is used when an address other then the robot teach inprogress signal (X225.7) of the robot system is to be used or when a condition is to be added. When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that robot teach operation is in progress. (This signal is valid when K19#0 = 1.) This signal provides the same function as the interaction/independent input (X17.2) of the robot interface. When this signal is set to ON, the robot system is placed in the interaction mode. (When using this signal, do not use X17.2.) This signal provides the same function as the system start input (X17.4) of the robot interface. When this signal is set to ON, system operation is started. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. (This signal is valid when K25#3 = 1.) When this signal is set to ON, the robot operation screen is displayed. When this signal is set to OFF, the screen display returns to the previous screen.
(Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Address
Function
Robot system cycle stop command
SO17_4 (R1367.4)
Robot system stop command
SO17_5 (R1367.5)
Robot reset
SO17_6 (R1367.6)
Peripheral device ready
SO17_7 (R1367.7)
Automatic side door open
SO18_0 (R1368.0)
Automatic side door closed
SO18_1 (R1368.1)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [CYCLE STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON, the cycle stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during the cycle stop mode, the cycle stop mode is canceled. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. (This signal is valid when K25#0 = 1. When this signal is valid, the [CYCLE STOP] key cannot be used.) This signal provides the same function as the soft key [SYSTEM STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON, the system stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during the system stop mode, the system stop mode is canceled. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. (This signal is valid when K25#1 = 1. When this signal is valid, the [SYSTEM STOP] key cannot be used.) This signal provides the same function as the soft key [ROBOT RESET] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON, the reset signal is output to the robot. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. (This signal is valid when K25#2 = 1. When this signal is valid, the [ROBOT RESET] key cannot be used.) This signal posts the ready state of the peripheral device in the robot system. Ensure that this signal is set to ON when the peripheral device is ready. When this signal is OFF, system operation cannot be started. (This signal is valid when K21#4 = 1.) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate) is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms. When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate) is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
- 135 -
12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
12.34
B-85314EN-1/01
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item
At the Periodical Maintenance Screen, cumulative value of customize item can be counted with the desired condition by using following custom signal. (Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Address
Function
Customizing item 1 count signal Customizing item 2 count signal Customizing item 3 count signal Customizing item 4 count signal Customizing item 5 count signal Customizing item 6 count signal Customizing item 7 count signal Customizing item 8 count signal
SO23_0 (R1373.0)
When “CUSTOM (TIME)” is selected as Count type, count the time during the corresponding custom signal is ON. When “CUSTOM (COUNT)” is selected as Count type, count the number of the corresponding custom signal is changed from OFF to ON.
12.35
SO23_1 (R1373.1) SO23_2 (R1373.2) SO23_3 (R1373.3) SO23_4 (R1373.4)
When using “CUSTOM (COUNT)” as Count type, corresponding signal is turned on more than 500 msec by custom ladder. If that time is short, counting number may be skipped.
SO23_5 (R1373.5) SO23_6 (R1373.6) SO23_7 (R1373.7)
BLOCK SKIP
Effective when K08#1 is 1. At this time, the block skip buttons on the screen (standard operator's panel) and operator's panel (operator's panel with the full keyboard) are disabled. (Custom ladder → System ladder) Signal
Block skip ON ( /, /1 ) Block skip ON ( /2 ) Block skip ON ( /3 ) Block skip ON ( /4 ) Block skip ON ( /5 ) Block skip ON ( /6 ) Block skip ON ( /7 ) Block skip ON ( /8 ) Block skip ON ( /9 )
Address
Function
SO7_1 (R1357.1)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip (/, /1) function.
SO24_0 (R1374.0)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /2 ) function.
SO24_1 (R1374.1)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /3 ) function.
SO24_2 (R1374.2)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /4 ) function.
SO24_3 (R1374.3)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /5 ) function.
SO24_4 (R1374.4)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /6 ) function.
SO24_5 (R1374.5)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /7 ) function.
SO24_6 (R1374.6)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /8 ) function.
SO24_7 (R1374.7)
Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /9 ) function.
- 136 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
13
USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
(Variable timer) Functional instruction No.: 3
Do not write any instructions in this area. Timer No.
Timer relay
Timer start condition
• • • • •
After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON. The effective timer Nos. are 121 to 200. For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address. Set the desired timer value on the PMC parameter - Timer screen. The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.
(Fixed timer) Functional instruction No.: 24
Timer No.
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Time that the timer is set for Timer relay
Timer start condition
• • • •
After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON. The effective timer Nos. are 1 to 140. For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address. The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.
- 137 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
(Rising edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 57
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
• • •
Register No.
Output
If the start condition turns ON, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle. The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once. The valid register No. range is the same as that for the falling edge detection function (SUB58).
(Falling edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 58
??
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
• • •
Register No.
Output
If the start condition turns OFF, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle. The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once. The valid register No. range is the same as that for the rising edge detection function (SUB57).
- 138 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
(Counter) Functional instruction No.: 5
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Counter No.
Control condition CN0 UPDOWN RST ACT
• • • • • •
Countup output
Control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Function Starts the counter with 0. Starts the counter with 1. Up counter Down counter Cancels a reset. Resets a counter. Deactivates a timer. Activates a timer.
The output turns ON when the setting becomes equal to the count. The effective counter Nos. are 40 to 69. To control RST and ACT, use a pulse signal. RST and ACT function at the rising edge of a pulse signal. For the counter output, you can specify any desired address. Enter the desired setting on the PMC parameter - Counter screen. The effective counter settings are 0 to 32767.
- 139 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
(Jump) Functional instruction No.: 10 (Jump end) Functional instruction No.: 30
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
Number of coils to jump over
Do not write any instructions in these areas.
• • • •
If the start condition turns ON, control jumps over the specified number of coils without executing them at all. If specifying the number of coils, do not use JMPE (SUB30). If the number of coils is set to 0, control jumps over the JMP (SUB10) to JMPE (SUB30) section. Control jumps over any functional instructions.
(Common line control) Functional instruction No.: 9 (Common line control end) Functional instruction No.: 29
Do not write any instructions in this area.
Start condition
No. of coils to be turned off
Do not write any instructions in these areas.
• • • • • •
If the start condition turns OFF, the specified number of coils are turned OFF. If specifying the number of coils, do not use COME (SUB29). If the number of coils is set to 0, the COM (SUB9) to COME (SUB29) section are turned OFF. Any functional instructions will be executed even if the start condition with the COM instruction is OFF, but the output of the execution results will be turned OFF. In a range specified with a COM, you cannot specify another COM. The output of WRT.NOT (inverted output of logic operation result) will be "1" if the start condition with the COM instruction is OFF.
- 140 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
B-85314EN-1/01
(Binary decoding) Functional instruction No.: 25
A B C Start condition D
The following explanation is limited to those cases in which specified M codes are to be decoded. Parameter A
Format specification
B C
Code data address Decoding instruction No.
D
Decoding result output address
Function Set a format in the format of 0nn4, where nn specifies that 8 x nn M codes are to be decoded. nn may be 0 to 99. If 0 is specified, eight M codes will be decoded. Examples: To decode M200 to M205, set 0014(14). To decode M200 to M207, set 0014(14). To decode M200 to M209, set 0024(24). To decode M200 to M219, set 0034(34). Set F10. Specify the number of the first M code to be decoded. Example: To decode M codes starting with M200, set 200. Specify an unused internal relay (R address). If the nn in the format specification is 0 or 1, 1 bytes is required; otherwise, consecutive nn bytes are required.
In the above examples: If M200 is specified, R2100.0 is ON. If M201 is specified, R2100.1 is ON. If M202 is specified, R2100.2 is ON. : If M207 is specified, R2100.7 is ON.
- 141 -
13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (Conditional subprogram call) (Unconditional subprogram call)
B-85314EN-1/01
Functional instruction No.: 65 Functional instruction No.: 66
Subprogram number called Call condition
• •
If the conditional subprogram call instruction CALL (SUB65) is specified, the specified subprogram is called only when the call condition is ON. If the unconditional subprogram call instruction CALLU (SUB66) is specified, the specified subprogram is called unconditionally.
- 142 -
14.SETTING PARAMETERS
B-85314EN-1/01
14
SETTING PARAMETERS
Parameter K03#6 K08#0
Function
K14#2
Center through coolant pump control ON/OFF control of the lamp inside the machine Block skip ON/OFF control Single-block ON/OFF control Dry run ON/OFF control Custom PMC editing Spindle/cutting override control by custom PMC Signal "ON" condition of S18.0
K14#3
Additional axis clamp control signal
K14#4 K14#5 K14#6 K14#7 K15#7 K16#0 K16#1
Machine interior cleaning coolant control Interlock control for each axis Emergency stop control Feed hold control Custom PMC function Operator's panel disable function While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button While the operator's panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply While the operator's panel is disabled, the skip key Teaching signal control Cycle stop control System stop control Robot reset control System startup control
K08#1 K08#3 K08#4 K14#0 K14#1
K16#2 K16#3 K16#4 K19#0 K25#0 K25#1 K25#2 K25#3
K #*
: PMC parameter, keep relay : *-th bit
- 143 -
0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled
1: Controlled 1: Controlled
0: 0: 0: 0: 0:
1: 1: 1: 1: 1:
Not controlled Not controlled Not controlled Enabled Not controlled
0: Memory mode and remote mode 0: Standard address
Controlled Controlled Controlled Disabled Controlled
1: Memory mode only
0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled 0: Not controlled 0 : Disables
1: Allocated with custom PMC 1: Controlled 1: Controlled 1: Controlled 1: Controlled 1: Controlled 1: Controlled 1 : Enables
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
0 : Canceled
1 : Not canceled
0 * Disables
1 : Enables
0: 0: 0: 0: 0:
1: 1: 1: 1: 1:
Not controlled Not controlled Not controlled Not controlled Not controlled
Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
15 15.1
B-85314EN-1/01
ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen
The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be displayed on the PMC alarm screen. Alarm number ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR(OPTION)
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
Enter the sequence program again. If this error recurs even after you have entered the sequence program again, the error may be due to a hardware fault. In that case, contact us. Reduce the size of the sequence program. Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option that allows you to set a larger program size. Reduce the size of the sequence program. Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option that allows you to set a larger program size. Change the sequence program so that it specifies the adequate PMC type, by using the programmer.
The sequence program is invalid.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH
Contact us.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK ERROR. PLEASE TURN ON POWER AGAIN WITH PRESSING 'O'&'Z'. (CLEAR PMC SRAM) ER17 PROGRAM PARITY
Turn on the power of the CNC again, by holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at the same time. Replace the backup batteries.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR
Enter the sequence program again. If this error recurs even after you have entered the sequence program again, the error may be due to a hardware fault. In that case, contact us. Enter the sequence program again. Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen again, and terminate the editing operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.
ER22 NO PROGRAM ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS OUT OF RANGE
Enter the sequence program again. Correct the sequence program; change the parameter number specified in a functional instruction to a value that is within the allowable range.
ER33 I/O Link ERROR(CHn) (Note3)
Contact us; replace the faulty hardware.
- 144 -
The sequence program is too large to load into the save area. The sequence program is invalid.
The sequence program exceeds the size specified by the ladder step count option.
The PMC type specified in the sequence program does not match the type of the PMC actually in use. An unsupported function is used in the sequence program. The nonvolatile memory of the PMC system needs to be initialized in such cases as when you have changed the PMC model. The parity of the sequence program is invalid.
Reading sequence program was interrupted. During editing the ladder, the screen display is switched to a CNC screen by the operation of a function key. The sequence program is empty. An out-of-range parameter number is specified in the TMR, TMRB, TMRBF, CTR, CTRB, DIFU, or DIFD functional instruction. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number ER34 ER34 I/O Link ERROR (CHn Gxx) (Note1)(Note3)
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx) (Note1)(Note3)
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Faulty location/corrective action Check the cable connections to the devices of group xx. Check whether the power of each I/O device has been turned on before the CNC. Replace any device of group xx in which the PMC control module is embedded. Reduce the output data count of group xx.
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx) (Note1)(Note3)
Reduce the input data count of group xx.
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN BASE(CHn) (Note3)
Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or less.
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA OVER(CHn Gxx) (Note1)(Note3)
In case of I/O Link, reduce the total amount of output data of all groups to 128 bytes or less. In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total amount of output data of all groups to 256 bytes or less.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA OVER(CHn xx) (Note1)(Note3)
In case of I/O Link, reduce the total amount of input data of all groups to 128 bytes or less. In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total amount of input data of all groups to 256 bytes or less.
ER43 PROGRAM DATA ERROR(PT/NT)
Store sequence program which is compiled again after recompilations using FANUC LADDER-III. If you see the same alarm again after , contact us. Add a required function block option.
ER45 NO OPTION (FUNCTION BLOCK)
- 145 -
Contents An I/O device communication error occurred on the slave side of group xx.
The output data count of I/O Link group xx exceeds the upper limit (33 bytes). Or the output data count of I/O Link i group “xx” exceeds the upper limit (65 bytes for the normal I/O, 29 bytes for the safety I/O). The superfluous data is regarded as invalid. The input data count of I/O Link group xx exceeds the upper limit (33 bytes). Or the input data count of I/O Link i group “xx” exceeds the upper limit (65 bytes for the normal I/O, 29 bytes for the safety I/O). The superfluous data is regarded as invalid. The slot number for the I/O Link exceed the upper limit (10). The slot number larger than 11 is regarded as invalid. The I/O area for the I/O Link is insufficient. (The area allocated to the group “xx” and later on the output side is regarded as invalid.) In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area is insufficient in the normal update cycle mode. The I/O area for the I/O Link is insufficient. (The area allocated to the group “xx” and later on the input side is regarded as invalid.) In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area is insufficient in the normal update cycle mode. The sequence program is invalid.
No function block option is specified.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Alarm number
B-85314EN-1/01
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
ER46 MESSAGE DATA UPDATE ERROR. PLEASE TRUN OFF POWER AFTER SAVING DATA.
Save the corrected sequence program or message data for multi-language display to FROM. Moreover, turn the power off/on.
ER47 ILLEGAL OVERRIDE FUNCTION SETTING (TOO MANY PMC PATHS)
The override mode of the force I/O function is available in 3 or less PMC paths in same time. In some PMC paths, make the function invalid. Moreover, turn the power off/on. Remove the setting of exceeding setting time on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR SETTING screen.
The message data in the sequence program or the message data for multi-language display cannot be updated. It is necessary to turn off/on the power. The ladder program cannot be executed when this alarm occurs. The override function is enabled in four or more PMC paths.
ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER(xxH)
ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER ERROR ER51 PMC EXECUTION PERCENTAGE ERROR
Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to 11904.
ER52 I/O Link CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ERROR (Note3) ER54 NC-PMC I/F ASSIGNMENT ERROR ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION CYCLE ERROR ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F ASSIGNMENT ERROR ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE SETTING ERROR ER60 I/O Link i ERROR(CHn) (Note3) ER61 I/O Link i ERROR(CHn Gxx) (Note1) (Note3)
Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to 11912.
ER62 I/O Link i DCS ERROR (Note3) ER63 I/O Link CHANNEL SETTING ERROR (Note3)
ER64 I/O Link i TOO MANY CONNECTED GROUPS(CHn) (Note3)
Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to 11909.
Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to 11929. Check CNC parameter No. 11930. Check CNC parameter No. 11932. Check CNC parameter No.11940 to No.11944. Contact us. Exchange of the hardware.
Check the cable connected to the device of group “xx”. Check the power supply of the I/O device if the power is turned on earlier than the power of CNC. Exchange the I/O device in group “xx” in which PMC control module is built. Contact us. Exchange of the hardware. Change the channel configuration in order to reduce the I/O points. As for the communication method for each channel, specify the CNC parameter No. 11933#0 and 1.
Reduce the number of connected I/O devices to 24 or less.
- 146 -
The activated condition of step sequence exceeds the time limit, which is set on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR SETTING screen. The execution order setting of the multi-PMC function is invalid. The execution percentage setting of the multi-PMC function is invalid. The I/O Link channel assignment to the PMC system is invalid. The interface assignment between NC and PMC is invalid. The ladder level 1 execution cycle setting is invalid. The assignment of multi-path PMC interface is invalid. The setting of PMC Memory Type is invalid. The LSI for I/O Link i is faulty.
The connection error occurred in the slave of group “xx”.
The LSI for I/O Link i DCS is faulty. Total I/O points are over 4096/4096 points in system. For the I/O Link, the I/O points are 1024/1024 points for one channel. For the I/O Link i, 2048/2048 points for one channel. 25 or more of I/O devices are connected in channel “n”.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
ER65 I/O Link i TOO MANY SLOTS(CHn) (Note3) ER66 I/O Link i PMC ADDRESS OVERLAPPED (PMCm X(Y)nnnn) (Note3)
Reduce the number of connected I/O modules to 256 or less.
257 or more of I/O modules are connected in channel “n”.
Enter the PMC address or size again so that any address is not used by multiple PMCs that share PMC memory.
ER67 I/O Link i TOO MANY SAFETY I/O GROYPS (Note3)
Reduce the group number of safety I/O.
ER68 I/O Link i TOO MANY ASSIGNMENTS IN HIGH SPEED MODE (CHn,Gyy) (Note1) (Note3)
When there are some groups which is set to high-speed update cycle mode in I/O Link i, Correct the transmission timing. Refer to subsection “3.4.6”.
ER69 I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT ADDRESS INVALID(CHn Gyy) (Note2)(Note3) ER70 PMC ADDRESS BLOCK OVERLAPPED BETWEEN I/O Link AND I/O Link i(PMCm X(Y)nnnn) (Note3)
Correct the assignment data of I/O Link i.
The address X(Y)”nnnn” assigned in PMC path “m” is assigned to another PMC path that is shared the common memory with PMC path “m”. The total group number of safety I/O in PMC paths exceed 4 or the total group number of safety I/O in DSCPMC exceed 4 for I /O Link i. In the channel n, the transmission size exceeds the limit of high-speed mode for I/O Link i. The assignment of group “yy” or later cannot be performed. The address of false PMC path is assigned in group “yy” of channel “n” of I/O Link i assignment data.
ER71 I/O Link i STATUS ALARM LENGTH OVER IN GROUP(CHn Gxx) (Note1)(Note3) ER89 EDITING I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS NOT COMPLETED ER90 TOO LARGE I/O CONFIGURATION DATA (Note3) ER91 I/O CONFIGURATION DATA PARITY (Note3) ER92 I/O CONFIGURATION DATA ERROR BY I/O ER93 UNSUPPORTED I/O CONFIGURATION DATA (Note3) ER94 I/O CONFIGURATION DATA ERROR (Note3)
Delete the assignment data for I/O Link i or correct the assignment address. Correct the X/Y address block of the I/O Link channel. (The setting of Machine signal interface of PMC configuration parameter) Check the communication method of I/O Link. (NC parameter 11933#0,#1) Check the setting of the selectable assignment data function for I/O Link i. Correct the configuration of I/O devices and reduce the total of the status alarms to 64bytes or less. Finish the edit of I/O configuration data.
Reduce the I/O configuration data file.
Input I/O configuration data file again. When re-input cannot solve this error, the hardware may be failure. Contact us. Input I/O configuration data file again.
There is a PMC address block which is assigned in both I/O Link and I/O Link i.
The total of the status alarms for I/O devices connected with group “xx” of channel “n” exceeds 64 bytes I/O configuration data is invalid because that the editing of the I/O configuration data is in the midst. I/O configuration data is larger than the save area or invalid. The parity of I/O configuration data is invalid.
Correct the type of I/O configuration data and input again.
Reading of I/O configuration file is interrupted. The type of I/O configuration data is invalid.
Re-compile the I/O configuration data by FLIII. Moreover, input again.
Data configuration of I/O configuration data is abnormal.
- 147 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Alarm number ER95 I/O DEVICE MISMATCH(CHn) (Note3)
ER96 I/O Link MAX GROUP OVER(CHn) (Note3)
ER97 I/O Link FAILURE(CHn Gxx) (Note1) (Note3)
WN02 OPERATE PANEL ADDRESS ERROR
Faulty location/corrective action When this alarm occurs on a well-worked machine, the causes may be following: Disconnection of communication cable or contact fault. The power of an I/O device is turned off. Or the power on is delayed. The failure of an I/O device. The power of some I/O devices remain when the power of CNC is turned off/on. Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on when the power of CNC is turned off/on. When this alarm occurs during a debugging of sequence program, the following causes also come up. The configuration (type, order or number) of the I/O devices is wrong. Invalid I/O configuration data is registered. You can confirm the error I/O device in the “I/O Device Monitor” screen. Check the PMC paths and addresses of first and second blocks of n channel on configuration parameter setting screen. Check the total groups of first and second block on I/O module assignment. Check the parameter setting of "Selectable I/O Link assignment function". When this alarm occurs on a well-worked machine, the cause may be following. The failure of the cable or contact from group (“xx” – 1) to “xx”. The power of an I/O device of group “xx” or later is turned off. Or the power on is delayed. The failure of an I/O device of group “xx” or (“xx” – 1). The power of some I/O devices remain when the power of CNC is turned off/on. Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on when the power of CNC is turned off/on. If this alarm occurs during a debugging of sequence program, the following causes also come up. The group number of I/O device is invalid. The mistake of the assignment setting of I/O modules. The mistake of the parameter setting of "Selectable I/O Link assignment function" The mistake of the machine signal interface setting. You can confirm the details of the error in the “I/O Device Monitor” screen. Correct the Series 0 operator's panel address that is set in the PMC system parameter.
- 148 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents This alarm occurs when actual I/O devices connected to CNC differ from the I/O configuration data registered in the “I/O Device Monitor” screen. The ladder program runs regardless of the occurrence of this alarm.
When dual assignment of I/O Link channel is used, total groups of first and second block exceeds 16 groups. The ladder program runs regardless of the occurrence of this alarm. This alarm occurs when less I/O devices are connected. This alarm occurs when a total group count of the I/O module assignment are different with one of connected device count. The ladder program runs regardless of the occurrence of this alarm.
The Series 0 operator's panel address that is set in the PMC system parameter is invalid.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Faulty location/corrective action
WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN
Modify the ladder program and turn on the power of the CNC again. Refer to subsection “4.15” for details.
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR(STACK)
Correct the sequence program so that the subprogram has eight or fewer levels of nesting.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM
If you want to use the current sequence program next time you power on the system, write the sequence program to flash ROM. If you have made any unwanted change to the sequence program by mistake, read the original sequence program from flash ROM.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP SEQUENCE)
Add the step sequence option. Arrange so that the step sequence subprogram will not be called.
WN11 INCOMPATIBLE FUNCTION
WN58 UNSUPPORTED FUNCTION
Compile the sequence program again with FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package. The Override function is for debugging only. So, please disable the function when shipping the machine. Correct the sequence program with Ladder editing function on PMC screen.
WN59 MESSAGE FILE SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.
WN60 MESSAGE FILE SYMBOL INVALID
Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.
WN61 MESSAGE FILE ADDRESS DUPLICATE
Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.
WN62 MESSAGE FILE NUMBER ERROR
Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.
WN57 OVERRIDE FUNCTION IS ACTIVE
- 149 -
Contents The ladder program was stopped while communication was in progress between CNC and PMC. This alarm may cause the WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB functional instructions to malfunction. There are too many levels of nesting (levels more than 8) for the CALL or CALLU functional instruction to call the subprogram. You have changed the sequence program using the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or DATA I/O screen, but you have not yet written the changed sequence program to flash ROM. If you shut down the system without writing the changed sequence program to flash ROM, the changes you have made will be lost next time you turn on the power. No step sequence option was found when the system attempted to execute a step sequence. An incompatible functional instruction is used in the sequence program. The Override function is activated. An unsupported functional instruction is used in the sequence program. The functional instruction was skipped. In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol that does not exist in the ladder is defined. In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol other than an A address is defined. The A address area has a duplicate definition between a symbol and address or between symbols. A message number differs between the ladder and message file for multi-language display at the same A address.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Alarm number
B-85314EN-1/01
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
WN63 MESSAGE FILE IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM
If you want to use the current message file for multi-language display next time you power on the system, write the message file to flash ROM.
WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE OVER
Reduce the size of the message file for multi-language display. Contact us and specify an option for a larger size.
WN65 MESSAGE FILE MISMATCH
Contact us.
WN66 MESSAGE FILE PARITY
Enter the message file for multi-language display again. If this error recurs even after you have entered the message file for multilanguage display again, the error may be due to a hardware fault. In that case, contact us. Enter the message file for multi-language display again.
You have changed the message data for multi-language display using DATA I/O screen, but you have not yet written the changed message data to flash ROM. If you shut down the system without writing the changed message data to flash ROM, the changes you have made will be nowhere next time you turn on the power. The message file for multilanguage display is too large to load into the save area. The message file for multilanguage display is invalid. An unsupported function is used in the message file for multilanguage display. The parity of the message file for multi-language display is invalid.
WN67 MESSAGE FILE ERROR BY I/O WN68 I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM
If you want to make updated I/O configuration data effective, write the data to Flash ROM.
- 150 -
Reading the message file for multi-language display was interrupted. The I/O configuration data was updated in the I/O configuration editor screen or data I/O screen but the data has not been written to Flash ROM yet. The data will be lost if the save operation is not performed.
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm Ybbb = **H ) (Note1)
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Faulty location/corrective action Check DO of the relevant device.
Contents The DO alarm (ex. a short circuit with the ground) occurs at byte “zz” of slot “yy” of group “xx” in channel “n”. Y “bbbb” of PMC path ”m” is the address at which the alarm occurred. DCSPMC Y”bbbb” is the address for DCSPMC. Display of “PMC*Y****” is the case of occurrence of unassigned address.
WN70 I/O Link i STATUS ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz = **H) (Note1)
Check the alarm information of applied I/O device.
The “**H” shows some bits at which the alarm occurs by hexadecimal. (Ex. “PMC1Y115=28H” shows the alarm occurs at Y115.3 and Y115.5 in PMC1. “28H” means “00101000” in binary. ) For the details of the alarm of I/O devices, refer to the “CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)”. The status alarm except for the DO alarm occurs at byte “zz” of slot “yy” of group “xx” in channel “n”. The “**H” shows some bits at which the alarm occurs by hexadecimal. For the details of the alarm of I/O devices, refer to the “CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)”.
NOTE 1 The displayed group number in ER34, ER35, ER36, ER38, ER39, ER61, ER68, ER71, ER97, WN69 and WN70 is wiring number of I/O device. 2 The group number displayed in ER69 is the number of I/O Link i assignment data. 3 When some PMC alarms related to I/O Link and I/O Link i occur, all of I/O devices in all of channels do not be liked with the CNC.
- 151 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
15.2
B-85314EN-1/01
PMC System Alarm Messages
Error Messages when SYS_ALM199 (PMC General) Alarm number PC004 CPU INVALID INSTRUCTION -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC006 CPU INVALID SLOT INSTRUCTION -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC009 CPU ADDRESS ERROR -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC010 DMA ADDRESS ERROR -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC012 CPU USER BREAK EXCEPTION -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC030 RAM PARITY PC030 S-RAM PARITY -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC060 BUS ERROR -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE (PMCn) PC070 LADDER SPE(PMCm) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE (PMCn) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (TASK:xx) PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (INT:xx) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC080 SYSTEM EMERGENCY -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD -----------------------------------------
Faulty location/corrective action This alarm may be due to a main board fault.
Contents A CPU error occurred in the PMC system.
A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC system.
A bus error occurred in the PMC system.
A stack error occurred with the SPE functional instruction of the ladder program of n path.
A stack error occurred with the FBE functional instruction of the ladder program of path n. A stack error occurred. (detected by the software).
System emergency state of the PMC LSI.
- 152 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
Faulty location/corrective action
PC090 SYSTEM EMERGENCY (SOFTWARE) PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT (SOFTWARE) PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT (UNKNOWN) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC093 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT (xx) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC094 UNEXPECTED TRAP EXCEPTION (xx) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR (PMCn) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC096 LADDER CODE ERROR (___) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (PMCm) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC098 PMC SOFTWARE CRC ERROR PC098 PMC SOFTWARE ECC ERROR (_____:_) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD ----------------------------------------PC501 CNC/PMC INTERFACE ERROR (PATHn) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD -----------------------------------------
Contents CPU error (unexpected NMI) occurs in PMC control software.
A trap exception of unknown cause occurred with the PMC control software.
RAM check error occurred.
The read or write operation between CNC and PMC failed
- 153 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error Messages when SYS_ALM197 (PMC General) Alarm number PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE (DCSPMC) -----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD ----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE (DCSPMC) -----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD ----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR (DCSPMC) -----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD ----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR (DCSPMC) -----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD -----------------------------------------
Faulty location/corrective action This alarm may be due to a CPU card fault.
Contents A stack error occurred with the SPE functional instruction of the ladder program of DCSPMC.
A stack error occurred with the FBE functional instruction of the ladder program of DCSPMC.
RAM check error occurred.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM196 (PMC Watch Dog) Alarm number PC073 WATCH-DOG ALARM(CNCPMC) -----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD -----------------------------------------
Faulty location/corrective action This alarm may be due to a main board fault.
Contents The PMC CPU is not running.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM195 (I/O Link) Alarm number PC050 I/O Link ER1 CHn:GRxx:yy COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn : GROUP xx -----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn / GROUPxx ----------------------------------------
Faulty location/corrective action Check the I/O device of group “xx” in channel “n” – Instantaneous power failure – Unstable power line Check the I/O Link cable between JD1B of group “xx” and JD1A of group “xx-1” – faulty wiring – incomplete contact The I/O Link device of group “xx” in channel “n” is faulty.
- 154 -
Contents An I/O Link communication error occurred. “n” is a channel number (1 to 3). “xx” is a group number (0 to 15). “yy” is a internal error code. This error occurs when the communication with the device of group “xx” in channel “n” is stopped. The causes are as follows: – Instantaneous power failure, unstable voltage or unstable power line of the device – Faulty wiring or incomplete contact of communication cable – Faulty device Please note that It may not show an accurate group number with some conditions of the problem.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
Faulty location/corrective action
PC051 I/O Link ER2 CHn:yy:xx:ww:vv COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn -----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn ----------------------------------------
When you use an I/O UnitModel A, no base extension unit is connected corresponding to an I/O assignment data. Check connection of I/O devices and I/O assignment data. When you use Power Mate as I/O Link slave device and/or Servo Motor Beta series I/O Link option, some system alarm occurs in such devices. A Communication may be influenced by noise. Check the ground wire and the shield of the communication cables. The output of the I/O Link devices is short-circuited. The power of the I/O Link master and/or slave devices is faulty. – Instantaneous power failure – Unstable power line Incomplete contact of the communication cable Faulty wiring of the communication cable Check the grounding of the shield wire of the earth terminal or the communication cable of I/O devices. I/O Link devices are faulty. I/O Link master is faulty. n=1,2: main board n=3: CPU card
Contents An I/O Link communication error occurred. “n” is a channel number (1 to 3). “yy”, “xx”, “ww” and “vv” are internal error code. There are various causes as for this error.
Error Messages when SYS_ALM194 (I/O Link i) Alarm number PC052 I/O Link I PMC LSI RAM PARITY ERROR -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------MAIN BORAD --------------------------------------------------PC053 I/O Link I SLAVE LSI RAM PARITY ERROR -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name” (Note1) --------------------------------------------------PC054 I/O Link I ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name” (Note) ---------------------------------------------------
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
Change the main board.
A RAM parity error occurred in PMC LSI on the main board.
Change the I/O device of the unit.
A RAM parity error occurred in “y”th unit (group “x”) of channel “n”.
Check the power supply of the I/O unit.
A power disconnection alarm occurred in the “y”th unit (group “x”) of channel “n”.
- 155 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Alarm number
Faulty location/corrective action
PC055 I/O Link I I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC UNIT1(GROUP0) CNC : MAIN BOARD UNIT1 : “Unit name” (Note1) --------------------------------------------------PC055 I/O Link I I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1) UNITy(GROUPx) UNITy –1 : “Unit name” (Note1) UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1) --------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I I/O Link I DISCONNECTION -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC UNIT1(GROUP0) CNC : MAIN BOARD UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1) --------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I I/O Link I DISCONNECTION -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1) UNITy(GROUPx) UNITy –1 : “Unit name” (Note1) UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1) --------------------------------------------------PC057 I/O Link I SAFETY I/O ALARM -----< ERROR POSITION >----UNITy : “unit name” (Note 1) ----------------------------------------PC058 I/O Link I SLAVE LSI EXTERNAL ALARM -----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name” (Note1) ---------------------------------------------------
Check whether any noise is inserted between the CNC and 1st unit. Check the ground status of the slave device and the contact of the connection cable.
A communication error occurred between the CNC and 1st unit (group 0) of channel “n”.
Contents
Check whether there any noise is inserted between the “y-1”th unit (group “x-1”) and “y”th unit (group “x”). Check the ground status of the slave device and the contact of the connection cable.
A communication error occurred between the “y-1”th unit (group “x1”) and the “y”th unit (group “x”) of channel “n”.
Check whether there is disconnection or incomplete contact for the cable between the CNC and 1st unit (group 0).
Connection error occurred between the CNC and 1st unit (group 0) of channel “n”.
Check whether there is disconnection or incomplete contact of the cable between the “y-1”th unit (group “x-1”) and “y”th unit (group “x”).
Connection error occurred between the “y-1”th unit (group “x1”) and “y”th unit (group “x”) of channel “n”.
Change the I/O device of the unit. If the error still occurs, change the main board.
A hardware failure of the safety I/O occurred between the CNC and the “y”th unit.
Change the I/O device of the unit.
A hardware failure occurred on the “y”th unit (group “x”) of channel “n”.
NOTE 1 When an unknown unit is connected, the hardware ID is displayed. 2 For some I/O devices, one unit such as a safety I/O unit may consist of two groups. If a connection failure occurs between groups containing units of the same type, PC058 instead of PC056 indicating a connection failure occurs as a unit failure.
- 156 -
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
15.3
Operation Errors
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen Message INPUT INVALID LADDER PROGRAM IS PROTECTED BY PASSWORD ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME
Faulty location/corrective action Input a valid address or numeric value. Enter the password.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Input a existent subprogram number or symbol. Input a defined symbol or bit address.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND THE FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT ADDRESS
Specify a bit address for the write coil search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION BLOCK
The system cannot pick up all the nets. Choose the nets to pick up, by using the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER display screen, and then perform the net pickup operation manually. Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the ladder data. Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function. Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit function block.
- 157 -
Contents The input address or numeric value is invalid. The screen cannot be displayed because the program is protected by the password. A nonexistent subprogram number or symbol is specified. An undefined symbol character string is specified. The specified net is not found. The specified address is not found. The specified functional instruction is not found. You entered a byte address when specifying an address used for the write coil search. The system failed to pick up all the nets because there were 128 nets or more to be picked up.
The ladder data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another application is accessing the ladder data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function. You tried to edit the FB body program.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
THIS NET IS PROTECTED
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS
Reduce the range of data to copy. Perform the copy operation several times, copying a smaller range of data at a time. Reduce the size of data to paste.
Make sure that the address types match for the alteration operation. Make sure that the address types match for the alteration operation. Check the address to be input, and then enter it correctly.
THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY
Enter a write-permitted address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE MISMATCHED
Check the types of the address in "OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter the correct address or addresses. Define symbol data in "OLD ADDRESS". Make sure that the address types match for the alteration operation. Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit function block. Cut nets which do not include any function block. Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit function block. Copy nets which do not include any function block. Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit function block. Use NET EDITOR screen.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL ***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL CANNOT CUT FUNCTION BLOCK
CANNOT COPY FUNCTION BLOCK
CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION BLOCK CANNOT INPUT AT THIS SCREEN CANNOT EDIT INPUT/OUTPUT PARAM ADDRESS
- 158 -
Contents When you are editing data on a persubprogram basis, you cannot edit the subprogram frame nets (END1, END2, END3, SP, and SPE). The selected range of data exceeds the size of the copy buffer.
An attempt was made to paste data whose size exceeded the free space of the sequence program. An attempt was made to alter a bit address to a byte address. An attempt was made to alter a byte address to a bit address. • A character string was entered that was unacceptable as a PMC address. • A wildcard (*) was specified in an inappropriate manner. • Either "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW ADDRESS" was not entered. • An attempt was made to alter a write coil address to a writeprohibited bit address. • An attempt was made to alter an address set in an output parameter of a functional instruction to a writeprohibited bit address. The type of the addresses in "OLD ADDRESS" does not match that in "NEW ADDRESS". No symbol data is defined for "OLD ADDRESS". Symbol data is already defined for "NEW ADDRESS". You tried to cut the net including the function block.
You tried to copy the net including the function block.
You tried to edit the FB body program. You tried to set an address in the output section that is omitted in the function block. An address in the input section of an input/output parameter in the function block cannot be changed.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents When the input parameter of the function block is plural data type, any constant cannot be set.
NO CONSTANT TO PARAMETER OF PLURAL TYPE
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen (when updating) Message OVERLAPPED COM
END IN COM END1 IN COM END2 IN COM JMPE IN COM
SP/SPE IN COM
COME WITHOUT COM
COME NOT FOUND AFTER COM DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER (WARN)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER
Faulty location/corrective action If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If the COM is unnecessary, remove it. If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If COM is unnecessary, remove it. JMPE and corresponding JMP must have same COM/COME status. Review JMP range and COM range, to adjust not to overlap with each other: it is possible that one range includes the other completely. If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If the COM is unnecessary, remove it. If COM is missing, add it in proper position. If the COME is unnecessary, remove it. If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If the COM is unnecessary, remove it. If some of them are unnecessary, remove them. If all of them are necessary, assign other number to parameter of them to make them unique. (If two or more instructions with same parameter number will never be active simultaneously at one time, the Ladder program has a possibility to work correctly, however, it is recommended from safety and maintenance points of view, that all these instructions should have different parameter number with each other.) If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct number not to exceed the maximum number defined by each PMC model.
- 159 -
Contents There is no COME that corresponds to this COM. END,END1,END2, or END3 is found between COM and COME. JMPE is found between COM and COME, and JMP and corresponding JMPE have different COM/COME status.
SP or SPE is found between COM and COME. There is no COM that corresponds to this COME. There is no COME that corresponds to this COM. Plural CTRs have the same number as their parameter. (This is warning.)
CTR has parameter number that is out of range.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Message DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD NUMBER (WARN)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER
NO END NO END1 NO END2 NO END3 DUPLICATE END1 DUPLICATE END2 DUPLICATE END3 GARBAGE AFTER END GARBAGE AFTER END2 GARBAGE AFTER END3 OVERLAPPED JMP
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM LEVEL
COME IN JMP
END IN JMP END1 IN JMP END2 IN JMP END3 IN JMP SP/SPE IN JMP
JMPB OVER COM BORDER
B-85314EN-1/01
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
If some of them are unnecessary, remove them. If all of them are necessary, assign other number to parameter of them to make them unique. (If two or more instructions with same parameter number will never be active simultaneously at one time, the Ladder program has a possibility to work correctly, however, it is recommended from safety and maintenance points of view, that all these instructions should have different parameter number with each other.) If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct number not to exceed the maximum number defined by each PMC model. Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in proper position.
Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same number as their parameter. (This is warning.)
Remove extra END1, END2 or END3.
Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are found.
Remove unnecessary nets, and move necessary nets to proper position so that they will be executed. If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the JMP is unnecessary, remove it. JMP and corresponding JMPE must have same COM/COME status. Review JMP range and COM range, to adjust not to overlap with each other: it is possible that one range includes the other completely. COME and corresponding COM must have same JMP/JMPE status. Review COM range and JMP range, to adjust not to overlap with each other: it is possible that one range includes the other completely. If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove it.
There are some nets after END, END2 or END3, which will not be executed. There is no JMPE that corresponds to this JMP.
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the JMP is unnecessary, remove it. JMPB and its destination must have same COM/COME status. Review range of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not to overlap with each other: it is possible that one range includes the other completely.
SP or SPE is found between JMP and JMPE.
- 160 -
DIFU or DIFD has parameter number that is out of range.
END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found.
JMP and corresponding JMPE have different COM/COME status.
COME is found between JMP and JMPE, and COM and corresponding COME have different JMP/JMPE status.
END,END1,END2, or END3 is found between JMP and JMPE.
JMPB and its destination differ in COM/COME status.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message JMPB OVER LEVEL
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND JMPC IN BAD LEVEL
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND
LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL
JMPC INTO COM
JMPE WITHOUT JMP
JMPE NOT FOUND AFTER JMP TOO MANY LBL
DUPLICATE LBL
OVERLAPPED SP
SPE WITHOUT SP
SPE NOT FOUND AFTER SP
END IN SP
Faulty location/corrective action JMPB can only jump to the same program level, or within a subprogram. If the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in proper position. If it should be JMPC, correct it. If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL is missing, add it in proper position. JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If it should be JMPB or JMP, correct it. If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL is missing, add it in proper position: JMPC jumps into level 2. JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL of same L-address that the JMPC is intended to jump exists in the subprogram, assign different L-address to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB or JMP, correct it. LBL for JMPC must be located out of any COM and COME pair. If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is located wrong, move it to correct position. If the L-address of JMPC is wrong, correct it. If JMP is missing, add it in proper position. If the JMPE is unnecessary, remove it. If JMPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the JMP is unnecessary, remove it. Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error still occurs, adjust the construction of program to use less LBLs. If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, remove them. If all of these LBLs is necessary, assign other L-addresses to them to make all LBLs unique. If SPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the SP is unnecessary, remove it. If SP is missing, add it in proper position. If the SPE is unnecessary, remove it. If SPE is missing, add it in proper position. If the SP is unnecessary, remove it. If SPE is missing, add it in proper position. If END is in wrong place, move it to proper position.
- 161 -
Contents JMPB jumps to different program level.
Can not find proper LBL for JMPB. JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and COME.
There is no JMP that corresponds to this JMPE. There is no JMPE that corresponds to this JMP. There are too many LBLs.
Same L-address is used in plural LBLs.
There is no SPE that corresponds to this SP. There is no SP that corresponds to this SPE. There is no SPE that corresponds to this SP. END is found between SP and SPE.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Message DUPLICATE P ADDRESS
DUPLICATE TMRB/TMRBF NUMBER (WARN)
ILLEGAL TMRB/TMRBF NUMBER
DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER (WARN)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION
SP IN BAD LEVEL
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN NO WRITE COIL CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL
Faulty location/corrective action If some of these SPs are unnecessary, remove them. If all of these SPs is necessary, assign other P-addresses to them to make all SPs unique. If some of them are unnecessary, remove them. If all of them are necessary, assign other number to parameter of them to make them unique. (If two or more instructions with same parameter number will never be active simultaneously at one time, the Ladder program has a possibility to work correctly, however, it is recommended from safety and maintenance points of view, that all these instructions should have different parameter number with each other.) If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct number not to exceed the maximum number defined by each PMC model. If some of them are unnecessary, remove them. If all of them are necessary, assign other number to parameter of them to make them unique. (If two or more instructions with same parameter number will never be active simultaneously at one time, the Ladder program has a possibility to work correctly, however, it is recommended from safety and maintenance points of view, that all these instructions should have different parameter number with each other.) If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct number not to exceed the maximum number defined by each PMC model. If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If the subprogram is missing, create it. Confirm that this ladder program is correct one. If this program is correct one, all these unsupported instructions have to be removed. SP can be used at top of a subprogram. Correct it so that no SP exists in other place. This ladder program must be all cleared once, and remake ladder program. Add proper write coil. CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or in subprograms. Do not use any other places.
- 162 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents Same P-address is used in plural SPs.
Plural TMRBs/TMRBFs have the same number as their parameter. (This is warning.)
TMRB/TMRBF has parameter number that is out of range.
Plural TMRs have the same number as their parameter. (This is warning.)
TMR has parameter number that is out of range.
Subprogram that is called by CALL/CALLU is not found. Unsupported instruction for this PMC model is found.
SP is found in wrong place.
Ladder program may be broken by some reason. Write coil is necessary, but is not found. CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message SP IN LEVEL3
CS/CM/CE IN COM
CS/CM/CE IN BAD LEVEL
CM/CE WITHOUT CS
INSTRUCTION EXCEPT CM IN CS OVERLAPPED CS
FB BODY PROGRAM IS BLOKEN
Faulty location/corrective action If END3 is located wrong, move it to correct position. If the SP is unnecessary, remove it. If COME is missing, add it in proper position. If the COM is unnecessary, remove it. CS, CM or CE must be used in Level 2 or in subprograms. Do not use any other places. If CS is missing, add it in proper position. If the CM or CE is unnecessary, remove it. If CE is missing, add it in proper position. If the instruction other than CM is unnecessary, remove it. If CE is missing, add it in proper position. If the CS is unnecessary, remove it. The ladder program must be deleted and remake it.
Contents SP is found in level 3.
CS,CM or CE is found between COM and COME. CS,CM, or CE is used in wrong place.
There is no CS that corresponds to this CM or CE. Instruction except CM is found between CS and CE. There is no CE that corresponds to this CS. FB body program is broken.
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen Message ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION NAME TOO MANY FUNCTION IN ONE NET TOO LARGE NET
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION IS FORBIDDEN
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED
BAD COIL LOCATION
SHORT CIRCUIT
FUNCTION AFTER DIVERGENCE IS FORBIDDEN
Faulty location/corrective action Specify the name of an available functional instruction. Only one functional instruction is allowed to constitute a net. If necessary, divide the net into plural nets. Divide the net into plural nets so that step number in a net may become small. Coil without input, or coil connected to output of functional instruction that has no output, causes this error. If coil is not necessary, remove it. If necessary, connect it to meaningful input. Output of functional instruction can not be connected to a contact, nor to conjunction with other signal that will be implemented by logical-or operation. Write coil is not found even if it is expected. Add proper write coil to the net. Coil can be located only at rightmost column. Any coil located at other place must be erased once, and place necessary coils in correct place. Find contact with terminals connected by short circuit, and correct connections. Functional instruction can not be used in output section of net. If necessary, divide the net into plural nets.
- 163 -
Contents The entered name of functional instruction is invalid. Too many functional instructions are in one net. Net is too large. When a net is converted into the object, the net exceeds 256 steps. No signal is provided for logical operation.
No logical operation with functional instruction output is permitted, except write coils. Write coil is expected, but not found.
Coil is located in bad position.
Some contacts are connected with short circuit. CTR has a parameter number that is out of the range. Functional instruction is used in output section of net.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Message
Faulty location/corrective action
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME INPUT
Left terminals of all coils in a net must be connected to same input point.
BAD CONDITION INPUT
Check the connection of all condition inputs of the functional instruction. Especially for functional instruction that has more than one condition input, check if connections to condition inputs interfere with each other. Correct the connection where is not connected. Examine every connection, and find unnecessarily bending connection, or coils that are connected to different point. Enter all of the relay addresses, and parameters of functional instructions.
NO CONNECTION NET IS TOO COMPLICATED
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED TOO LARGE DATA FOR NETEDITOR TOO MANY FUNCTIONS FOR NET-EDITOR BAD DIAGRAM STRUCTURE
NOT SUPPORT ENHANCED LADDER DIAGRAM
TOO COMPLICATED CIRCUIT AROUND FUNCTION
CONNECT OUTPUT TO COIL DIRECTLY
Change for being to modify net by [NEXT NET] soft key. Change for being to modify net by [NEXT NET] soft key. Examine every connection, and find the error of connection of relay or functional instruction. Replace other functional instruction which supports Structure of extended type net. Or, change the ladder net construction not to be Structure of extended type net. The circuit lines branched from a conditional input for some functional instruction must reach the right power line without joining the output line from the functional instruction. Refer to 8.3.4.3. Connect the output of the functional instruction directly to a coil.
SINGLE COIL IS EXPECTED
This functional instruction must have single coil directly connected to the output.
INVALID CIRCUIT FOR FB PARAMETER
Specify the name of contact and coil for the parameter of function block.
NO CONNECTION PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED
Connect the broken connection. Specify an address.
CAN NOT PLACE FB AND FUNCTION IN ONE NET NO ASSIGNMENT TO FB CONTACT
Delete the functional instruction placed on the same net as the function block. Specify a contact.
- 164 -
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents When a net contains more than one coil, the coils should not have any contact beside them affects only of the coils. Some condition input of functional instruction is not connected correctly.
The elements ,such as contacts and coils, are not connected.. Net is too complicated to analyze.
Relay with blank address, or blank parameter of functional instruction, is found. The net data in net editor screen is too large. There are too many functional instructions in net editor screen. Circuit is too complicated to analyze.
The ladder net Structure of extended type net contains a functional instruction which does not support Structure of extended type net. The circuit construction around functional instruction is too complicated.
The output of the functional instruction is not connected directly to a coil. A functional instruction has multiple coils connected to its output which are prohibited. The functional instruction is connected to the parameter of function block. The connection is broken. The address is not assigned to the input section and the coil of output section of a function block. A functional instruction is placed on the same net as the function block. The contact is not assigned in the input section for a BOOL type of the function block.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
TOO MANY CHARACTERS
Make sure that the entered character string is within the allowable input length.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function.
Contents The number of characters in the entered character string exceeds the allowable input length. Some of the characters are discarded. The title data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another application is accessing the title data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
TOO MANY CHARACTERS
Make sure that the entered address is within the allowable input length.
ADDRESS IS REQUIRED
Enter data in a batch correctly, as instructed in "Editing a set of symbol and comment data" in Subsection 9.2.2.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS
Enter an address correctly.
THE ADDRESS ALREADY HAS AN ENTRY THE SYMBOL NAME IS ALREADY USED PMC ADDRESS MUST BE ENTERED TOO LONG SYMBOL NAME TOO LONG COMMENT STRING THE STRING IS NOT FOUND OUT OF SPACE
Specify another address.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED BAD SYMBOL NAME
Specify another symbol. Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS field. Make sure that the symbol consists of 16 characters or less. Make sure that the comment consists of 30 characters or less. Specify another character string for the search. Create free space for the sequence program, by deleting unnecessary ladder or message data. Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the symbol/comment data. Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function. Change the symbol name.
- 165 -
Contents The number of characters in the entered address exceeds the allowable address input length. No address was entered during the batch input of address, symbol, and comment data using the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR screen. The specified address is invalid, or the entered address character string contains a space or spaces. An already registered address was entered. An already registered symbol was entered. No PMC address was entered when new symbol/comment data is registered. The entered symbol exceeds the specified number of characters. The entered comment exceeds the specified number of characters. The search was done for the specified character string but did not find it. The symbol/comment editing area has no free space. The symbol/comment data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another application is accessing the symbol/comment data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function. The symbol name is invalid.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Message CANNOT EDIT ADDRESS AUTO ASSIGNED SYMBOL ILLEGAL DATA TYPE ILLEGAL PROGRAM NAME LINE FEED IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THIS DATA LINE FEED IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THIS MODE NO SYMBOL. PROGRAM SETTING IS IGNORED NOTHING TO PASTE TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE UNAVAILABLE CHARACTERS WAS OMITTED.
Faulty location/corrective action Use FANUC LADDER-III to change the symbol.
B-85314EN-1/01
Enter a correct data type. Enter a correct program name.
Contents The symbol whose PMC address is assigned automatically by compiling FANUC LADDER-III, can not edit. The specified data type is invalid. The specified program is invalid.
Line feed code can be entered in comment data only. Do not enter it in other data.
Line feed code cannot be entered in this data.
Enter Line feed code in the insert or overwrite mode.
Line feed code cannot be entered in this mode.
Symbol name is required for local symbol.
The specified program is ignored because no symbol is specified.
You need to copy or cut character strings before you paste them. Shorten the character string to copy or cut.
You try to paste character strings without copying or cutting ones. The character strings is too long to copy or cut. The characters which can not be used at pasted position, were omitted.
Do not copy or cut characters which cannot be used at pasted position.
Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
INPUT INVALID
Correct the message number. Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the batch message input process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER
Enter a four-digit number as the message number.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF RANGE
Enter the number in the range from 0 to 4095 for the message number of the format with path number, and 1000 to 9999 for the message number of other format. When entering kana or other Japanese characters, make sure that they are enclosed within a pair of @ signs. Enter a character string correctly between a pair of @ signs. Enter a character string correctly between a pair of @ signs. Enter a two-byte code correctly between @02 and 01@.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT FOUND BAD NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN "@-@" ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN "@-@" BAD NUMBER OF CHARACTERS FOR 2BYTE CODE ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE
CLOSING CONTROL CODE "01" IS NOT FOUND CONTROL CODE "XX" IS REPEATED
Enter a two-byte code correctly between @02 and 01@.
Enter the closing control code.
Remove any repeated control code.
- 166 -
Contents The format of the message number is invalid, or the delimiter code semicolon (;) - was not entered in the batch message input process. The entered message number contains any nonnumeric character, or a number shorter than four digits was entered. The entered message number is out of range.
One of the @ sign pair is missing.
The number of characters entered between the pair of @ signs is not even. One or more invalid character codes exist between the pair of @ signs. The number of characters in the twobyte code (characters entered between @02 and 01@) is not a multiple of four. The two-byte code (characters entered between @02 and 01@) contains one or more characters other than the JIS codes. The two-byte code (characters entered between @02 and 01@) lacks the closing control code (01). The starting control code (02), closing control code (01), and/or umlaut code (0D) is repeated.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Faulty location/corrective action
CLOSING "]" IS NOT FOUND BAD NUMERICAL DATA FORMAT BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR NUMERIAL DATA PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes are entered in pairs. Specify the numerical data correctly.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function.
Enter an available address. Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the message data.
Contents The delimiter codes for numerical data are not entered in pairs. The format of the numerical data is invalid. The address section of the numerical data is invalid. The message data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another application is accessing the message data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
GROUP NUMBER IS TOO LARGE BASE NUMBER IS TOO LARGE SLOT NUMBER IS TOO LARGE
Specify 15 or a smaller value as the group number. Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10). Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10). For other I/O units, specify 10 or a smaller value. Specify 0 or a large value as the slot number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10). For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger value. Check the I/O unit name or address.
The entered group number is too large.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO SMALL
I/O UNIT NAME MISMATCH ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME NOT ENOUGH SPACE
Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables 3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3. Enter the data again after creating free space by deleting the data allocated behind the current cursor position or by other adequate means.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the I/O module data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8-level protection function.
- 167 -
The entered base number is too large. The entered slot number is too large.
The entered slot number is too small.
The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y address, or the output I/O unit is assigned to the X address. The entered I/O unit name is invalid. There is not enough free address space for the size of the I/O unit you are going to assign. This error also occurs if you attempt to assign the I/O unit to an already allocated address space. The I/O module data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application is accessing the I/O module data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O CONFIGURATION EDITOR screen Message
Faulty location/corrective action
TOO MANY GROUPS (CHx)
Delete any unnecessary group, then create a new group.
TOO MANY SLOTS (CHx)
Delete any unnecessary slot, then create a new slot.
TOO MANY SLOTS IN A GROUP (CHx, Gyy)
Delete any unnecessary slot, then create a new slot.
NO SLOT(Gxx) SLOT NUMBER IS REQUIRED SLOT NUMBER DUPLICATE
Add a slot. Enter a slot number.
CAN NOT DELETE MPG SLOT ILLEGAL SLOT NUMBER ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS
Turn the MPG flag off in the group setting screen. Enter a slot number not greater than 32. Enter a correct PMC address again.
ILLEGAL SIZE
Enter a correct size again.
SLOT HAS NO ASSIGNMENT
Enter a PMC address and size.
ILLEGAL COMMENT
Enter a correct comment again.
PMC ADDRESS OVERLAPPED (PMCm X(Y)nnnn) TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS (CHx, Gyy)
Enter the PMC address or size so that it is set only once.
TOO MANY INPUT POINTS (CHx, Gyy)
Reduce the number of input points of the group.
TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS (CHx)
Reduce the number of output points in the channel.
TOO MANY INPUT POINTS (CHx)
Reduce the number of input points in the channel.
TOO MANY CHARACTERS
Enter a comment within the input field.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND INPUT INVALID
Enter a correct numeric value.
Change the slot number used more than once.
Reduce the number of output points of the group.
- 168 -
Contents A new group cannot be created because the maximum number of groups per channel is exceeded. A new slot cannot be created because the maximum number of slots per channel (256 slots) is exceeded. A new slot cannot be created because the maximum number of slots per channel (32 slots) is exceeded. There is no slot in group Gxx. No slot number is entered for a slot. More than one slot data item having the same slot number is found in the same group. No MPG slot can be deleted in the slot setting screen. The entered slot number is greater than 32. The entered PMC address is invalid. Alternatively, no PMC address is entered. The entered size is outside the PMC address range. Alternatively, a value of 0 is entered as the size. For a slot, a PMC address or size is not entered for both DI and DO. An entered comment does not conform to the extended symbol and comment format. Address PMCm X(Y)nnnn is also assigned to another slot in I/O Link i assignment data. The number of output points of the I/O Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds the upper limit (65 bytes by default or 29 bytes for the safety I/O device). The number of input points of the I/O Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds the upper limit (65 bytes by default or 29 bytes for the safety I/O device). Warning message. The number of I/O Link i output points set in CHx exceeds the upper limit. Warning message. The number of I/O Link i input points set in CHx exceeds the upper limit. The number of characters in an entered comment exceeds the input width. The specified address is not found. A numeric value is invalid.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Faulty location/corrective action
I/O CONFIG DATA IS BROKEN TOO MANY SAFETY I/O GROUPS
Enter an I/O configuration file again.
TOO MANY ASSIGNMENTS (H.SPEED)(CHn,Gyy)
When a group in the high-speed transfer cycle mode is connected to I/O Link i, correct assignment so that the assignment for each group is performed within the quartered transfer timing with referencing Subsection 3.6.4 “Transfer Cycle”. Correct the number of basic groups for the I/O assignment selection function of I/O Link i.(0 to 24) Use addresses X0/Y0 and following.
BASIC GROUP INVALID
UNAVAILABLE ADDRESS FOR DCSPMC
Reduce the number of I/O Link i safety I/O groups.
THIS DATA IS BEING MODIFIED
Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the I/O configuration data.
INTERNAL ERROR(0xCxxxxxxx)
Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
Contents I/O Link i assignment data is invalid. Warning message. More than four I/O Link i safety I/O groups are specified either on the PMC or DCS side in the entire system. Warning message. In CHn, group yy and following exceed the transfer capacity limit in transfer timing assignment processing when the highspeed mode of I/O Link i is used.
The number of basic groups for the I/O assignment selection function of I/O Link i is invalid. Addresses X200/Y200, X400/Y400, or X600/Y600 and following are assigned to a group for which DCSPMC is specified for the PMC path. I/O configuration data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application is accessing the I/O configuration data. This error occurs due to an internal factor. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen Message INPUT INVALID SYMBOL UNDEFINED
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
Enter a numerical value correctly, as instructed in Section 9.8. Enter a defined symbol or bit address.
The entered numerical value or its input format is invalid. An undefined symbol character string was entered. The system parameter data cannot be displayed because online communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application is accessing the system parameter data. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED
Disconnect the online communication with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other applications from accessing the system parameter data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen Message INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
Enter a numerical value correctly, as instructed in "Screen operations using other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2. Enter a defined symbol or bit address.
The entered numerical value or its input format is invalid.
Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
- 169 -
An undefined symbol character string was entered. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen Message INPUT INVALID MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP OR IN MDI MODE PWE MUST BE ON EITHER PWE OR KEY4 MUST BE ON THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED
Faulty location/corrective action Enter a numerical value correctly, as instructed in Section 7.3. Set a mode to MDI or emergency stop. Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC setting screen. Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC setting screen or set the key “KEY4” to “1”. Cancel the protection by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Contents The entered numerical value or its input format is invalid. The status of NC is not MDI mode or emergency stop. The “PWE” in NC setting screen is ”0”. The “PWE” in NC setting screen is ”0” or the program protect key “KEY4” is ”0”. This function is protected by the programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen Message TRACE FUNCTION IS ALREADY IN USE NO SAMPLING ADDRESS NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER ADDRESS USB MEMORY IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION. USB MEMORY IS NOT READY. USB MEMORY IS FULL. USB MEMORY HAS BEEN REMOVED USB MEMORY IS NOT FORMATTED USB HARDWARE ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or some other application finishes using the trace function before executing it. Specify a bit address as a sampling address in the trace parameter. Specify a bit address as the stop trigger address in the trace parameter. Specify a bit address as the sampling trigger address in the trace parameter. Terminate another function that is using the USB memory, then perform operation again. Check whether a USB memory is inserted. Delete any unnecessary files and allocate a required capacity. Insert the USB memory, then execute input/output operation again. Replace the USB memory with another one. Replace the USB memory with another one. If this error still occurs after replacement, contact us, and report the displayed message correctly. Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
FANUC LADDER-III or some other application is currently using the trace function. No sampling address is specified in the trace parameter. The stop trigger address is not specified in the trace parameter.
- 170 -
The sampling trigger address is not specified in the trace parameter. The USB memory is being used by another function. No USB memory is inserted. The USB memory is full. A USB memory is removed while it is being accessed. The inserted USB memory cannot be recognized. This error occurs due to a USB hardware failure. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
This error occurs due to an internal factor. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen Message INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED INVALID STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER ADDRESS UNSUPPORTED TRACE SETTING FILE INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE n) SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS ADJUSTED UNKNOWN SETTING WAS SKIPPED(LINE n) INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS WAS FOUND TOO MANY SAMPLING ADDRESSES
Faulty location/corrective action Enter a numerical value that is within the specified data range of the relevant trace parameter. Enter a defined symbol or bit address. Specify a bit address as the stop or sampling trigger address. Enter a PMC signal address that can be used as the stop trigger address. Enter a PMC signal address that can be used as the sampling trigger address. This file cannot be handled. Set data in the TRACE SETING screen. Output the trance setting file again. Alternatively, set data in the TRACE SETING screen. Check the data on the TRACE SETING screen. Check the read trace data. Check the read trace data. Check the read trace data.
THE FILE IS NOT TRACE SETTING FILE FILE NAME CONTAINS RESERVED WORD. USB MEMORY IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION.
This file cannot be read. Specify a correct file. Correct file name.
USB MEMORY IS NOT READY.
Check whether a USB memory is inserted. Insert the USB memory, then execute input/output operation again. Replace the USB memory with another one. Correct the file name.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN REMOVED USB MEMORY IS NOT FORMATTED FILE NAME IS INVALID. FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE SPECIFIED. USB HARDWARE ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
Terminate another function that is using the USB memory, then perform operation again.
A folder name is specified. Specify an appropriate file name. Replace the USB memory with another one. If this error still occurs after replacement, contact the FANUC service center, and report the displayed message correctly. Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
- 171 -
Contents A nonnumeric value or an out-ofrange parameter value was entered. An undefined symbol character string was entered. A byte address was specified as the stop or sampling trigger address. The bit address entered as the stop trigger address is invalid. The bit address entered as the sampling trigger address is invalid. Unsupported trace setting file was read. An invalid setting was found. The file may be broken. The values were adjusted according to the read data. (This is warning.) An unknown trace setting item was found and ignored. (This is warning.) An invalid sampling address was found. (This is warning.) The number of sampling addresses exceeds the upper limit. (This is warning.) An attempt was made to read a file which was not a trace setting file. “FORFANUC” cannot be used in the top of the file name. The USB memory is being used by another function. Another function is formatting the USB memory. No USB memory is inserted. A USB memory is removed while it is being accessed. The inserted USB memory cannot be recognized. An invalid character was found in a file name. An attempt was made to read or write a folder. This error occurs due to a USB hardware failure. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
This error occurs due to an internal factor. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O Diagnosis screen Message ENTER STRING TO SEARCH. I/O DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IS NOT SUPPORTED INPUT INVALID LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN
NO GROUP FORMAT. PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED.
Faulty location/corrective action Enter a string before starting a search. To use the I/O diagnosis function, update the PMC system software. Check the entered string. Check the information displayed on the PMC alarm screen and reload the program. Use [GROUP] on the I/O diagnosis (setting) screen. Retry after completing the function that is using the program.
REACHED TO THE END OF SYMBOL DATA.
To make another search, specify a string again.
SYMBOL ORDER IS NOT AVAILABLE.
THE GROUP IS NOT FOUND FORCING IS PROTECTED ON THIS PATH.
Use the FANUC LADDER-III to convert the program to one with the extended symbol & comment function. Check the specified group. Disable the programmer protection function.
THE STRING IS NOT FOUND
Check the specified string.
15.4
Contents No search string is specified. The I/O diagnosis function cannot be used because the PMC system software is an older version. The entered string is invalid. The program is broken.
No group display is set. The program cannot be referenced because it is being used by another function. The search has been completed until the end of the data has been reached. The format of this program does not allow sorting and display in symbol order. The specified group is not found. The forced input/output function is currently protected on the selected PMC path. The specified string is not found.
I/O Communication Error Messages
The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below.
Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation Message
Faulty location/corrective action
MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY MEMORYCARD IS FULL
Check whether a memory card is installed. Delete files to create available space.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE PROTECTED MEMORYCARD IS NOT FORMATTED TOO MANY FILES IN MEMORYCARD FILE NOT FOUND
Release the write protection of the memory card. Format the memory card.
FILE IS READ-ONLY FILE NAME IS INVALID COULD NOT FORMAT MEMORY CARD
UNSUPPORTED MEMORYCARD CAN NOT DELETE FILE
Delete unnecessary files to reduce the number of files. On the list screen, check the file name or file number. Check the attributes of the file. Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The NC cannot format this memory card. Use another unit such as a personal computer to format the memory card. Replace the memory card with another one. Check the attributes of the file.
- 172 -
Contents No memory card is installed. There is no available space in the memory card. The memory card is write-protected. The memory card cannot be recognized. There are too many files. The specified file cannot be found. Write to the specified file is not permitted. The file name is illegal. The memory card cannot be formatted.
This memory card is not supported. An error occurred when a file was deleted from the memory card.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
MEMORYCARD BATTERY ALARM THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY USED MEMORYCARD ACCESS ERROR DIFFERENCE FOUND
Replace the battery of the memory card. Change the file name to another one.
The battery of the memory card has become weak. The file name is already used.
Replace the memory card with another one.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY OTHER FUNCTION MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM DATA ID IS ILLEGAL FILE NUMBER CAN NOT SELECTED
Wait until the PMC user completes processing, then retry. This file cannot be read. Check the type of the file. If the file does not exist, the key entry is invalid. If this error occurs even when the cursor is placed at a file name, contact the FANUC service center. Check the total number of files on the list screen.
The memory card cannot be accessed. File comparison detected a mismatch. Another PMC user is using the memory card. An attempt was made to read a file, but its ROM data ID was illegal. The file number cannot be selected.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT EXIST FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED TO "128" MEMORY CARD IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION MEMORY CARD IS WRITE PROTECTED UNSUPPORTED MEMORY CARD COULD NOT DELETE FILE TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER
UNSUPPORTED TRACE SETTING FILE INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE n) SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS ADJUSTED UNKNOWN SETTING WAS SKIPPED(LINE n) INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS WAS FOUND TOO MANY SAMPLING ADDRESSES INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
Enter a numeric value not exceeding 128. Retry after terminating the other function that is currently using the memory card. Cancel the write protection of the memory card, or use another memory card that is not write protected. Use another memory card. Check the read/write permission attribute of the file. Delete unnecessary old trace result file or files.
This file is Invalid. Set data in the TRACE SETING screen. Output the trance setting file again. Alternatively, set data in the TRACE SETING screen. Check the data on trace setting screen. Check the read trace data. Check the read trace data. Check the read trace data.
Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
- 173 -
The entered file number is not present. The entered number exceeds the total number of files. A value up to 128 can be entered as the file number. Some other function is currently using the memory card. The memory card is write protected.
This is an unsupported type of memory card. The file cannot be deleted. No more trace result file can be created because the maximum trace result file number (file extension) has been reached. Unsupported trace setting file was read. Invalid setting value was found. The file may be broken. It was adjusted according to the contents. (This is warning.) An unknown trace setting item was found and ignored. (This is warning.) An invalid sampling address was found. (This is warning.) The number of sampling addresses exceeds the upper limit. (This is warning.) An error due to an internal factor occurred. Details on the error are displayed in parentheses.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages displayed during USB memory I/O operation Message FILE NAME CONTAINS RESERVED WORD. USB MEMORY HAS BEEN REMOVED USB MEMORY IS NOT READY. USB MEMORY IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION. THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY USED. OVERWRITE IT? FILE NOT FOUND USB MEMORY IS FULL. FILE IS READ-ONLY.
USB MEMORY IS NOT FORMATTED FILE NAME IS INVALID.
Faulty location/corrective action Correct file name. Insert the USB memory, then execute input/output operation again. Check whether a USB memory is inserted. Terminate another function that is using the USB memory, then perform operation again. Follow the message, and overwrite the file or specify another file name to write data. Check the file name or number on the file list screen. Delete any unnecessary files and allocate a required capacity. Specify another file or check the file attribute and delete the read-only attribute. Replace the USB memory with another one. Correct the file name.
DIFFERENCE FOUND THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT EXIST
Check the total number of files on the list screen.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED TO "128"
Enter a numeric value not greater than 128.
FOLDER CANNOT BE SPECIFIED.
The specified number indicates a folder. Enter an appropriate number. No folder can be selected in the file list screen. The file name corresponding to the specified file number consists of more than 32 characters. Enter an appropriate number. No file having a file name consisting of more than 32 characters can be selected in the file list screen. Replace the USB memory with another one. If this error still occurs after replacement, contact us, and report the displayed message correctly. Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
THIS FILE CANNOT BE SPECIFIED.
USB HARDWARE ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
- 174 -
Contents The string “FORFANUC” cannot be used in the top of the file name. A USB memory is removed while it is being accessed. No USB memory is inserted. The USB memory is being used by another function. An existing file name is specified as the write destination. The specified file was not found. The USB memory is full. The specified file is read-only.
The inserted USB memory cannot be recognized. An invalid character was found in a file name. File comparison detected a mismatch. The entered file number is not found. The entered number is greater than the total number of files. A value up to 128 can be entered as the file number. The specified number indicates a folder. An attempt was made to select a folder in the file list screen. The file name corresponding to the specified file number consists of more than 32 characters. An attempt was made to select a file having a file name consisting of more than 32 characters.
This error occurs due to a USB hardware failure. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
This error occurs due to an internal factor. An error code is indicated in parentheses.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation Message NOT IN EMG STOP MODE INVALID SEQUENCE PROGRAM DIFFERENCE FOUND FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY OTHER FUNCTION FLASH ROM HEADER ROM DATA ID IS ILLEGAL FLASH ROM IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)
Faulty location/corrective action Place the system in the emergency stop state. Check the program.
Wait until the PMC user completes processing, then retry. This file cannot be read. Check the type of the file. Retry after ending another function that uses flash ROM. Contact us, and report the displayed message correctly.
Contents The system is not in the emergency stop state. The transfer program is illegal. A file comparison detected a mismatch. Another PMC user is using the flash ROM. An attempt was made to read a file, but its ROM data ID was illegal. Flash ROM is in use by another function. An error due to an internal factor occurred. Details on the error are displayed in parentheses.
Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O operation. Message ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER FORMAT
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER IS REQUIRED COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED OR IN ERROR STATUS
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK THE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS RECEIVED DATA HAS OVERRUN OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING THIS CHANNEL BAD COMMUNICATION PARAMETER OTHER FUNCTION IS USING I/O FUNCTION
Faulty location/corrective action Specify a file of the PMC parameter format. Also, check the specified file to see whether its content is not disrupted. Specify a file of the handy file format. Also, check the specified file to see whether its content is not disrupted. Specify file of recognizable format such as PMC parameter format, or check the contents of the file. Specify file name or file number for the operation. Check the communication parameters such as baud rate, and retry to communicate. Check the power of I/O device is ON. Check the I/O device is connected. Check the cable that connects I/O device with PMC is correct one. If some error has occurred in I/O device, solve it. Check the PMC's communication parameters such as baud rate match the ones of I/O device. Check the communication parameters about flow control. Use the other channel, or stop the function. Check the communication parameters such as baud rate. Wait until function that using I/O function do finish, or stop the function.
- 175 -
Contents The specified file is not of the PMC parameter format.
The specified file is not of the handy file format. Cannot recognize the format of specified file. Need file name or file number to identify file to read, compare, or delete. Communication with the I/O device has been timeout. Any I/O device is not connected, or some error has occurred in it.
Invalid data has been received.
Too many data have received at once. Others function is using this channel. Setting parameters of communication are not correct. Another function such as FANUC LADDER-III is using I/O function.
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST Message
Faulty location/corrective action
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE FORMAT DATA
Check the file.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING ILLEGAL WRITE CODE SETTING SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION
Set a valid baud rate. Set a valid channel number. Set a valid parity bit. Set a valid stop bit. Set a valid output code. Wait until On-line function, do finish the using I/O function. In general, both of I/O function and On-line function should not be used at the same time.
B-85314EN-1/01
Contents The received data is not a program of the PMC system or is a program of some other incompatible type. The set baud rate is invalid. The set channel number is invalid. The set parity bit is invalid. The set stop bit is invalid. The set output code is invalid. Can not input/output of sequence program, because On-line function is using sequence program.
Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during the I/O operations Message ERROR OCCURS IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM UNKNOWN DATA TYPE MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP PWE MUST BE ON MUST BE IN EDIT MODE THIS FUNCTION IS NOT ALLOWED PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED BY OTHER FUNCTION THIS DEVICE IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION PMC PARAMETER IS PROTECTED BY OTHER FUNCTION LADDER TYPE UNMATCH TOO LARGE SEQUENCE PROGRAM SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION INVALID I/O CONFIGURATION DATA
Faulty location/corrective action Check the PMC alarm screen and correct the indicated program error accordingly. Check the file. Set to emergency stop. Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC setting screen. Set to the EDIT mode. Check the related settings. Retry after terminating the other function that is currently using the PMC parameter. Retry after terminating the other function that is currently using the specified device. Retry after terminating the other function that is currently using the PMC parameter. Specify a program of a valid type. Check the file. Or, change to a step number option that allows you to set a larger program size. Retry after terminating the other function that is currently displaying the ladder program. Read correct I/O configuration file.
- 176 -
Contents Data cannot be output because there is an error in the ladder program. The PMC type of the input data is unknown. The status of NC is not emergency stop when reading PMC parameter. The “PWE” in NC setting screen is ”0” when reading PMC parameter. The mode is not EDIT when reading PMC parameter. There are not all the settings that are needed to use this function. The PMC parameter is currently used by some other function and cannot be referenced by this function. The specified device is currently used by some other function and cannot be used by this function. The PMC parameter is currently used by some other function and cannot be changed by this function. The specified program is of a different type and cannot be read. The ladder program is too large to read. The ladder program is currently used by some other function and cannot be referenced by this function. Invalid I/O configuration data was read and any of the following operations was performed: - Writing it to the memory card - Comparing it with a memory card file USB - Writing it to flash ROM -Comparing it with flash ROM
15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST
B-85314EN-1/01
Message TOO LARGE I/O CONFIGURATION DATA I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS USED BY OTHER FUNCTION
Faulty location/corrective action Check the I/O configuration file. Terminate another function that is using the I/O configuration data, then execute operation again.
- 177 -
Contents The I/O configuration file is too large to read. I/O configuration data is being used by another function (such as FANUC LADDER-III).
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
On the personal computer, custom PMC editing can be performed using the programming system for sequence program development FANUC LADDER-III. For the method of operating FANUC LADDER-III, refer to the following manual: FANUC LADDER-III Operator’s Manual (B-66234EN) Use the procedure below when performing custom PMC editing with FANUC LADDER-III. (1) Backup of a ladder program From the ROBODRILL, back up a ladder program (PMC2) to be edited. (2) File conversion/decompilation (MEM file → LAD file) Convert the backed-up ladder program to a file that can be edited using FANUC LADDER-III. (3) Editing Edit the ladder program, message data, and so forth. (4) Compilation/file conversion (LAD file → MEM file) Compile the edited ladder program and convert it to a file that can be loaded into the ROBODRILL. (5) Loading of the ladder program Load the ladder program to the ROBODRILL by using a memory card or Handy File. (When using the multi-language display function, see Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION".)
CAUTION • FANUC LADDER-III ver. 6.30 or later is required. • To edit custom PMC for the ROBODRILL using FANUC LADDER-III, set "exparam" in the %%%FLSET file in the folder in which FANUC LADDER-III has been installed to "1". [%%%FLSET file] ;================================================= ; FANUC LADDER-III Initial Setting File ; ( `key word =' ] button.
- 191 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(4) Specify the file name of the ladder program to be installed.
After specifying the file name, click the [Finish] button. (5) When data conversion is complete, the following message appears. Click the [OK] button.
(6) Copy the loading file onto a floppy disk or memory card, then install the file on the ROBODRILL. (See Chapter 11.)
- 192 -
B-85314EN-1/01
A.4
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION
When creating a custom ladder program with this series by using a custom ladder program created in the past, note the following: • •
This series differs in the PMC configuration. So, ladder programs created with the old model must not be installed without modification. Even a ladder program created according to the PMC configuration of the new series may not operate normally when newly added interface signals are used, if the system ladder program version is earlier. Check whether the interface signals used are usable. The system ladder program number/version information can be checked on the following screens: PMC: Title data screen NC: System configuration screen
When a custom ladder program that was created with the old model and has a different program number/version is to be used with this system, extract only necessary portions to create a new second PMC ladder program. An example of procedure for creating a custom ladder program usable with this system by using FANUC LADDER-III (Version 6.30) from a custom ladder program created with an old ROBODRILL model is described below.
- 193 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(1) Open a ladder program created in the past. Select [File] → [Open File].
Select a saved LAD file or MEM file. When an LAD file is selected, the program list display window is opened. (Proceed to (2).) When a MEM file is selected, the message below is displayed. Click [OK].
- 194 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
A window for creating a new ladder program is displayed. Enter a desired program name then click [OK].
The message below is displayed. Click [OK].
Click [OK] without entering the password.
Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically closed. (Ignore warning W-4105 if output.)
- 195 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.
(3) Open a new ladder program to be created. (At the same time, start another FANUC LADDER-III.) By using the same procedure as described in (1), open a MEM format ladder program backed up from the machine of this series.
↓
- 196 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
Enter the program name and specify "31i-B PMC" in PMC Type then click [OK].
↓
The message below is displayed. Click [OK].
↓
The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.
↓
- 197 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically closed. The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.
- 198 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
(4) Copy the ladder program. Open subprogram P1500 of the custom ladder program created previously and select the portion between SUB71 and SUB72 (not including SUB71 and SUB72) then select [Edit] → [Copy]. (Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Copy].)
- 199 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Open P1500 of the ladder program to be created newly then move the cursor to the net of SUB72.
- 200 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
Select [Edit] → [Paste]. (Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Paste].)
This completes the copying of the ladder program. The symbols and comments used in the ladder program are also copied. (5) Connecting messages See Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES". (6) Connecting symbols and comments If necessary symbols and comments are not copied together with the ladder program, create a mnemonic file containing the symbols and comments from the custom ladder program created previously.
- 201 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Select [Tool] → [Mnemonic Conversion]. Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Symbol&Comment), and Selection Item (Full Options) then click [OK].
Open a mnemonic file containing the created symbols and comments with a text editor and leave only those symbols and comments that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file. (Delete those unnecessary symbols and comments that are used with the system.)
- 202 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program. Select [Tool] → [Source Program Conversion].
When only necessary symbols and comments are to be added, "Initialize the following data before conversion" need not be checked. (When initializing symbol and comment data, uncheck "Ladder".) (7) Convert X and Y addresses. The X and Y addresses may have been changed with each series. Convert the X and Y addresses to addresses usable with this series according to Chapter 5, "INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS". To use the address replacement function, move the cursor to an address to be replaced then select [Edit] → [Replace]. The window below is displayed. Enter an address before replacement in "Search string" and set an address after replacement in "Replace string" then click [Replace].
- 203 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
If addresses to be replaced are contiguous, select [Edit] → [Multi-replace...]. The window below is displayed. Set the start address of addresses before replacement and the start address of addresses after replacement with [New Data] then click [Exec]. Those addresses are replaced in a batch.
- 204 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
A.5
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES
When the PMC message multi-language display function is not used, edit messages on the message editing screen only. Create messages according to the descriptions below.
A.5.1
Ladder Program Message Editing
Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.
The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message numbers, and A addresses. Alarm Operator message A address
1900 to 1999 2060 to 2099 A100.0 to A149.7
- 205 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Add necessary messages.
To switch the message display language without using the multi-language display function, switch the message by using a ladder program and the interface signals described in Section 12.23. An example of program is provided below.
*
To switch the message by using this method, the power must be turned off then back on after switching the display language.
- 206 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
To use messages created previously, open the ladder program previously created then select [Tool] → [Mnemonic Conversion]. Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Message), and Selection Item (Full Options) then click [OK].
Open a mnemonic file containing the created messages with a text editor and leave only those messages that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file. (Delete those unnecessary messages that are used with the system.)
- 207 -
A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III
APPENDIX
Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program. Select [Tool] → [Source Program Conversion]. Set the mnemonic file name then click [OK] to incorporate the message data.
- 208 -
B-85314EN-1/01
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
B
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
B.1
OVERVIEW
This function can forcibly enter a value for the signal of an arbitrary PMC address. With this function, for example, an X value can be forcibly entered to enable sequence program debugging without using a machine, and a Y value can be forcibly entered to enable the signal wiring on the machine to be checked efficiently without using a sequence program. There are the following two input modes: Forced input/output mode and override mode. Use either of these modes according to your purpose. This function is added to the SIGNAL STATUS screen. (1) Forced input/output mode This mode is applied to all PMC addresses. However, signals changed by the forced input/output are overwritten when values written or input by a sequence program are scanned, and therefore the changes made by the forced input/output are lost.
Machine I/O addresses X,Y
Overwrite Overwrite Ladder program
G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E
Overwrite
Example 1: When forced input/output is applied to R0 in the following ladder program
X0.0 MOVE
1111 1111 K0 R0
(a) The initial signal status is as follows: X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H (b) A value of FFH is forcibly input to R0. X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH (c) When X0.0 is turned on, R0 indicates the result of input from the sequence program. X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H
- 209 -
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Example 2: When forced input is applied to X0 in a configuration where I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0 over an I/O Link The input value from I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0 at certain intervals. So, even if the value of X0 is forcibly modified, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle. Thus, the value of X0 is restored to the value input from I/O Unit-MODEL A.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.
X0 = 00h
3.Input from the machine in the next cycle
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
The forcibly modified value is overwritten with the input from the machine.
X0 = FFh
Cyclical transfer may also be performed for addresses that are not assigned. So, use the forced input/output function for X in the forced input/output mode to debug a sequence program when no I/O device is connected or assigned. When an I/O device is connected, use the override function described below to debug a sequence program.
- 210 -
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(2) OVERRIDE mode The state in which values modified by the forced input/output function cannot be overwritten by a sequence program or machine signals is referred to as override. In the override mode, override can be set for any X and Y signals. Forced input/output is applied to those X and Y addresses where override is not set, and also to addresses other than X and Y. Example: In this example, the forced input/output function is applied to X0 in a configuration where the I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to X0 with an I/O link.
1. Input from the machine
I/O Unit-MODEL A
NC
X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh
2. Override is set for X0.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
×
NC
X0 = FFh
The value transferred from I/O Unit-MODEL A is invalidated. X0 = FFh
3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
×
X0 = FFh
NC
X0 = 00h
Thus, the forced input function can be used for X addresses in the override mode to debug a sequence program while an I/O device is connected. When a Y address is placed in the override state, a value that has been forcibly modified by forced input/output is output to the I/O device.
- 211 -
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
CAUTION 1. In OVERRIDE mode, input/output signals are updated at 8-ms intervals in sync with the ladder level. When an I/O link is used which is usually updated at 2-ms intervals, an input/output signal timing delay occurs. For this reason, note that a sequence that depends on input/output signal timing may perform an unpredictable operation. 2. Note that, when OVERRIDE mode is set, the interval of the second level may be extended slightly. 3. Even if override is set for a Y address, the resultant value of a ladder operation before modified by forced input/output is displayed as the coil on/off value in LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. A value after modified by the forced input/output function is output to the I/O device. Note that the on/off indication on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen does not match a value output to the I/O device. Example: In this example, the forced input/output function is used for Y0.0 in the ladder below in a onfiguration where the I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to Y0 with an I/O link. Before OVERRIDE setting, the on/off indication in dynamic display matches a value output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown below
I/O Unit-MODEL A
X0.0
Y0.0
(off)
(off)
NC
Y0.0=off
(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)
If 1 is entered forcibly after setting OVERRIDE for Y0.0, the value modified by the forced input/output function is output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown below.
I/O Unit-MODEL A
X0.0
Y0.0
(off)
(off)
NC
Y0.0=on
(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)
WARNING Special care must be exercised when a signal with the forced input/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation of the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when persons are near the machine.
- 212 -
B-85314EN-1/01
B.2
APPENDIX
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
Use the procedures below to set the input/output modes. (1) Operation for enabling FORCING mode Use the procedure below. (a) Turn on the power. (b) Press the emergency stop button. (2) Operation for enabling OVERRIDE mode Use the procedure below. (a) Turn on the power. (b) Press the emergency stop button. (c) Set bit 0 of K906 (keep relay) to 1. (d) Turn the power off and on again while holding down the emergency stop button.
WARNING Special care must be exercised when modifying a signal with the forced input/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation of the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when persons are near the machine. CAUTION 1 Upon completion of forced input/output operations, reset keep relay K906#0 to 0. 2 Turning on the power with the emergency stop button released resets keep relay K906#0 to 0. (The OVERRIDE mode is disabled.) 3 The setting of OVERRIDE is not maintained when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on again, the setting of OVERRIDE is cleared for X and Y addresses. 4 Do not force input/output operations for any signal other than those (except the F address) usable with the custom PMC function. Never force input/output operations especially for X8.4 (emergency stop) or Y6.1 (Z-axis brake control).
- 213 -
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
B.3
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
SCREEN DISPLAY
On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the value of a desired signal can forcibly be modified. On this screen, the following two input modes are available: Forced input/output and override. To move to the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, click soft key [FORCED I/O] on the SIGNAL STATUS screen. The following operations can be performed on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen: • • • • • • • • • *1
Search for a signal: [SEARCH] Switch to the decimal display and input mode: [DEC] Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode: [HEX] Display the SIGNAL STATUS screen: [EXIT] Turn the signal on: [ON] Turn the signal off: [OFF] Set override: [OVRIDE SET] (*1) Clear override for a signal: [OVRIDE RESET] (*1) Clear override for all signals: [INIT] (*1) This soft key is enabled in override mode.
Input mode
Signal status display area
Additional information line
Key input line
Message display line
In the input mode section at the right of the title, "OVERRIDE" is displayed as the mode of the forced input/output function only in the override mode. In the signal status display area, the signal status of each address is displayed. For X and Y signals, the status of each bit for which override is set is displayed as follows. (1) For an X signal (Input signal from the I/O device) → (Input signal to the ladder program) In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the input signals to the ladder program on the right is displayed.
- 214 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
(2) For a Y signal (Output signal from the ladder program) → (Output signal to the I/O device) In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the output signals from the ladder program on the left is displayed.
On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error message is displayed when required.
B.4
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS
Soft keys on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen Force input/output Searches for an address.
Turns the signal on. Turns the signal off.
Switches to the decimal input mode.
Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.
Override Clears override for a signal. Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen. Turns the signal on.
Searches for an address.
Switches to the decimal input mode.
Turns the signal off.
Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.
- 215 -
Sets override.
Clears override for all signals.
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Operations using soft keys (1) [SEARCH] Search for an address Searches for a byte or bit address. (2) [DECIMAL] Switch to the decimal input mode Switches the contents of the byte to the decimal display and input mode. This soft key is enabled only when the hexadecimal display and input mode is set. (3) [HEX] Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode Switches the contents of the byte to the hexadecimal display and input mode. This soft key is enabled only when the decimal display and input mode is set. (4) [EXIT] Switch to the SIGNAL STATUS screen Terminates the forced input/output function. (5) [ON] Turn the signal on Places the signal at the cursor in the on state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending on the cursor position. (6) [OFF] Turn the signal off Places the signal at the cursor in the off state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending on the cursor position. (7) [OVRSET] Set override Places the X or Y address at the cursor in the override state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending on the cursor position. This soft key is enabled only in the override mode. (8) [OVRRST] Clear override for a signal Clears the override state of the X or Y address at the cursor. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending on the cursor position. This soft key is enabled only in the override mode. (9) Clear override for all signals Clears the override state of all X and Y addresses. This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.
- 216 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
Screen operations using other keys (1) INPUT key Use this key to modify the status of a signal or signals. (a) Setting in bit units • Enter 1, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the on state. • Enter 0, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the off state. • Just press the INPUT key to invert the on/off state of the signal. (b) Setting in byte units At the byte cursor, enter a binary number consisting of up to 8 digits, then press the INPUT key. (If an entered number is shorter than 8 digits, the number is entered starting from bit 0.) Example: When 100 is entered, the number is entered as follows: Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 When the cursor is on a HEX or DECIMAL field, hexadecimal or decimal input in byte units is available. (c) Continuous data input Continuous data can be entered vertically. The cursor moves at the end of continuously entered data. • Use a semicolon (;, EOB) as the data delimiter. Example: "1;0;1" + INPUT key • Use ;= to enter the same value as for the previous data. Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + INPUT key: 1,1,1,0,0 • Use ;; to skip an address. Example: "1;;1" + INPUT key: Nothing is entered in the second item. • Use "R;input-value;count" to enter the same input value as many times as the specified number. Example: "R;1;200" + INPUT key: A value of 1 is entered in the vertical 200 fields. (2) Cursor keys Use the cursor keys to select a signal whose value is to be modified. Pressing the cursor left key when the cursor is at bit 7 of an address changes the cursor to the byte cursor. Pressing the cursor right key when the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field of an address changes the cursor to the byte cursor for selecting the entire 1 byte next to the address. When the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field or is the byte cursor, the values of the entire 1 byte of the address can be modified. (3) Page keys Use the page keys to move the display.
Return key operation On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the return key is disabled. To terminate the forced input/output mode and display the SIGNAL STATUS screen again, use soft key [EXIT].
- 217 -
C. CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE
C C.1
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
When custom ladder program comment display needs to be switched according to the language setting on the CNC, set the system parameters according to the procedure below by using FANUC LADDER-III.
C.2
SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING
Use the procedure below to set a comment display language. (1) Open the custom ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III. (2) Open the system parameter screen.
- 218 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
C. CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE
(3) Click [Language for Comment]. Next, on the [Language for Comment] dialog box, set comment set numbers to be displayed on the PMC screen for the CNC display language. Number of display language settings (comments)
Displays the first comment when the CNC display language is English. Displays the second comment when the CNC display language is Japanese. Displays the first comment when the CNC display language is other than English and Japanese.
Comment set number First comment = 0 Second comment = 1 : Delimit a CNC display language from a comment set number with a comma.
CNC display language number
[CNC display language numbers] 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8:
English Japanese German French Chinese (traditional) Italian Korean Spanish Dutch
9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: -1:
- 219 -
Danish Portuguese Polish Hungarian Swedish Czech Chinese (simplified) Russian Other
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
D
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
With this series, the PMC message multi-language display function is available. When compared with the conventional multi-language display function using the message shift function, the PMC message multi-language display function has the features indicated below. For details, refer to "FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234)". •
Alarm message and operator message data is stored in a memory card format different from the format used for conventional ladder programs, and is loaded into the CNC independently of these ladder programs. Multi-language alarm message and operator message data can be defined. Multi-language settings can be made without dividing A addresses. This means that all A addresses can be used for each language to define many messages. When the CNC display language setting is changed, the language for alarm messages and operator messages is switched without turning off the power of the CNC.
• • •
To use the PMC message multi-language display function, use the following procedure: (1) (2) (3) (4)
Create a message file for multi-language display. Add message data to the main body of the ladder program. Convert the message data to a memory card format file. Incorporate the created memory card format file into the CNC.
TIP • Second PMC message files for the multi-language display function to be used with the custom PMC are not installed on the machine at the time of shipment from the factory. • To stop the use of the multi-language display function after a second PMC message file is installed to use the multi-language display function, the second PMC message file "M2PMCMSG" needs to be deleted. For the procedure of deletion, see (7) in Section 11.2, "OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN".
- 220 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
D.1
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
Create message data by using a text editor on the personal computer. Here, set message data in a language other than English. The data format is indicated below. 1.
File format File type = Text file (*.TXT) Character code = ANSI/Unicode(UTF-16) (Identification code) (Title information) (Comment between lines) (Message data 1) (Message data 2) (Comment between lines) (Message data 3) (Message data 4) : (Identification code)
2.
Identification code An identification code is used to mark the start and end of message data. Start: %@4-D End: %
3.
Title information Enclose title information in double quotation marks. Up to 256 half-size characters can be entered. (Title information can be omitted.)
4.
Comment between lines Enclose a comment between lines in double quotation marks. No comment between lines is output to a memory card format file.
- 221 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION 5.
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Message data
Example)
Language ID
Address
Message character string
$1
%A100.0
1900 COOLANT ALARM
(a) Language ID Specify a language ID for a message character string with "Dollar($)"+"Language ID".
1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
Japanese German French Chinese (Traditional) Italian
Language ID 7: Spanish 10: Portuguese 15: Chinese (Simplified) 16: Russian
(b) Address Be sure to prefix % to an address. The usable addresses are A100.0 to A149.7. (c) Message character string Specify an alarm message number at the beginning then specify an alarm message to be displayed. An example of message data is given below. ([@0A@] of title information represents a line feed code.) %@4-D " FANUC ROBODRILL D14/21iA SERIES MESSAGE DATA@0A@ EDITION : 0001@0A@ DATE
: 2012/03/29 "
$2 %A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:
Added alarm)
$2 %A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note: :
Added operator message)
:
$10
%A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:
$10
%A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note:
Added alarm) Added operator message)
%
TIP • In this message data file, set messages in a language other than English. • Set English message data as message data for the main body of the ladder program.
- 222 -
B-85314EN-1/01
D.2
APPENDIX
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM
Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.
- 223 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
Add and edit English messages. Even when no English message is needed, be sure to set alarm numbers.
The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message numbers, and A addresses. Alarm Operator message A address
1900 to 1999 2060 to 2099 A100.0 to A149.7
- 224 -
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
D.3
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA
D.3.1
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display
Convert a text file (mnemonic file) containing message data for multi-language display to a memory card format file. Open the command prompt screen.
Execute the following at the command prompt (as an example where a file created in Section D.1 is named PMC2_MSG.TXT): >C: >CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3 >FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM
Explanation) Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed. (Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.) Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the mnemonic format message file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) created in Section D.1 to a second PMC message file (PMC2_MSG.MEM) in the memory card format for multi-language display that can be loaded with the ROBODRILL. A message file in the memory card format can be created by creating and executing the following BAT file: File name (example): MAKE_MEM.BAT Contents of a BAT file (example): C: CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3 FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM
- 225 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
NOTE 1 FPMCMSG.exe is stored in the FANUC LADDER-III installation folder ("C\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3" usually). 2 Usually, the result of command execution is output to the output screen. Use a "greater than" sign (>) for redirection to a file or printer from the output screen. 3 Line comments other than title information are not output to a memory card format file. FPMCMSG is detailed below. FPMCMSG
[drive:][path]message-file1 [+ [drive:][path]message-file2] [/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file] [/l=[drive:][path]lad-file] /o=[drive:][path] mcard-file
[+
…]
Parameters [drive:][path]message-file1, [drive:][path]message-file2, … Specifies the location and name of a source file of multi-language PMC messages. Multiple files can be specified using a plus sign (+). If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed. /m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file A memory card file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally. For lad-mcard-file, specify the name of a memory card file of a PMC sequence program related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages. If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed. This parameter can be omitted. /l=[drive:][path]lad-file A LAD file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally. For lad-file, specify the name of a LAD file related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages. If the specified LAD file contains no memory card file, the check with this parameter is not performed. If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed. This parameter can be omitted. Do not execute this tool when the LAD file specified for /L is open on FANUC LADDER-III. /o=[drive:][path]mcard-file Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory card file) to be created. If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
D.3.2
Converting the Ladder Program
Compile the ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III to create a memory card format file. For details, see Section A.3.
- 226 -
B-85314EN-1/01
D.4
APPENDIX
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC
Install two memory card format files created in Section D.3 on the CNC. For installation of the files on the CNC, two methods are available: • One method writes the files directly to the flash ROM from the boot menu. • The other method reads the files from the I/O screen of the PMC to the memory then writes the files to the flash ROM. For details, see Chapter 11, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA".
D.5
CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE
When editing message data again by using a memory card format message file for multi-language display, convert data output from the machine, to a mnemonic format file, according to the following procedure: (1) Back up a ROBODRILL message file for multi-language display from the machine. (See Chapter 11.) (2) Copy the backed-up message file for multi-language display to the hard disk of the personal computer. (Example: Copy the message file to C:\PMC folder.) (3) Open the command prompt screen.
- 227 -
D. MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B-85314EN-1/01
(4) Execute the following at the command prompt: >C: >CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3 >FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.000 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT
Explanation) Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed. (Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.) Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the memory card format message file (PMC2_MSG.000) to a mnemonic format file (PMC2_MSG.TXT). (The file name is just an example. Change it to the name of an actually backed-up message file for multi-language display.) For repeated conversion, create a BAT file with the contents above. FPMCMSG is detailed below.
FPMCMSG
[drive:][path]mcard-file [/unicode] /o=[drive:] [path]message-text-file
Parameters [drive:][path]mcard-file Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory card file). If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed. /unicode Outputs the message character strings to a source file in Unicode. If this parameter is omitted, the message character strings are output in ANSI. /o=[drive:][path]message-text-file Specifies the location and name of a source file. If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
(5) With a text editor, open and edit the file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) converted to the mnemonic format.
- 228 -
INDEX
B-85314EN-1/01
INDEX
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL ................120 Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module) ..37 Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ................22 ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC ........47 AI TOOL MONITOR ..................................................127 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST.................144 ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY...132 ALARM OUTPUT 2....................................................117 AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ....................126
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION....................209 FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL ................106 FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL.............................126
I/O Communication Error Messages............................172 I/O Link Connection Unit ..............................................22 I/O Module Editing ......................................................189 I/O Unit Model-A...........................................................10 INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC...........................................227 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA ...............................78 INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS.............................6 INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS..............48 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS ...........................84 INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION) ................................................................117
BASIC SIGNALS ........................................................105 BLOCK SKIP...............................................................136
COMPLETION OF MACHINING ..............................125 CONFIRMATION .........................................................71 CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS.......129 CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................182 CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE .......................227 CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA ............................225 Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display225 Converting the Ladder Program ...................................226 COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW.....................................................125 Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item.......136 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ............................221 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM ..................223 CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE ...................................218 CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION...........193 CUSTOM MACROS ...................................................130 CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III ............................................................181
Ladder Editing .............................................................186 LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION .................................190 LADDER PROGRAM EDITING................................185 Ladder Program Message Editing ................................205
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89).......116 M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ...............................131 MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP....................................132 MACHINE STATUS ...................................................105 MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ..................................124 Message Editing...........................................................188 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen.......................................................................144 MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ...........220
NOTES.............................................................................4
DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS..71
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS .................................................................215 OPERATION CONTROL ...........................................131 Operation Errors...........................................................157 OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ...........................122 OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN......................81 OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN ....78 OPERATOR'S PANEL................................................121 Optional I/O Module Connection...................................46 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......10 OUTLINE ........................................................................1 OVERRIDE CONTROL..............................................133
EDITING .......................................................................50 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES65,205 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS...........................51,53 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ...................68 ENDING AN EDITING SESSION................................70 EXPLANATION OF TERMS .........................................3 EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..113 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION..............................................................110 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION..............................................................108
i-1
INDEX
B-85314EN-1/01
OVERVIEW .........................................................209,218
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used............................................................................46 PMC System Alarm Messages .....................................152 POSITION SWITCH ...................................................128 POWER-OFF ...............................................................132 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT...............................123
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ..........................117 ROBOT INTERFACE .................................................134
SCREEN DISPLAY..............................................128,214 SETTING PARAMETERS..........................................143 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS...................................74 SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT .....................................................213 SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS...................................................73 SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................5 SPINDLE .....................................................................127 STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......6 STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ...........................50 Switching to the Edit Screen ..........................................51 Symbol and Comment Editing .....................................187 System Parameter Editing ............................................189 SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING............................218
Terminal Module B ........................................................29 Title Editing .................................................................185 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ....................................118
USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 137
i-2
REVISION RECORD
B-85314EN-1/01
REVISION RECORD Edition 01
Date
Contents
Jun., 2012
r-1
B-85314EN-1/01
* B - 8 5 3 1 4 E N - 1 / 0 1 *
View more...
Comments
